WO2020230647A1 - Achromatic polarizer, achromatic polarizing plate using same, and display device - Google Patents

Achromatic polarizer, achromatic polarizing plate using same, and display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020230647A1
WO2020230647A1 PCT/JP2020/018265 JP2020018265W WO2020230647A1 WO 2020230647 A1 WO2020230647 A1 WO 2020230647A1 JP 2020018265 W JP2020018265 W JP 2020018265W WO 2020230647 A1 WO2020230647 A1 WO 2020230647A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
substituent
formula
polarizing element
transmittance
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2020/018265
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
由侑 服部
典明 望月
Original Assignee
日本化薬株式会社
株式会社ポラテクノ
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 日本化薬株式会社, 株式会社ポラテクノ filed Critical 日本化薬株式会社
Priority to CN202080033949.5A priority Critical patent/CN113795554A/en
Priority to JP2021519370A priority patent/JPWO2020230647A1/ja
Publication of WO2020230647A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020230647A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B31/00Disazo and polyazo dyes of the type A->B->C, A->B->C->D, or the like, prepared by diazotising and coupling
    • C09B31/16Trisazo dyes
    • C09B31/22Trisazo dyes from a coupling component "D" containing directive hydroxyl and amino groups
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B31/00Disazo and polyazo dyes of the type A->B->C, A->B->C->D, or the like, prepared by diazotising and coupling
    • C09B31/02Disazo dyes
    • C09B31/08Disazo dyes from a coupling component "C" containing directive hydroxyl and amino groups
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B31/00Disazo and polyazo dyes of the type A->B->C, A->B->C->D, or the like, prepared by diazotising and coupling
    • C09B31/16Trisazo dyes
    • C09B31/26Trisazo dyes from other coupling components "D"
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B33/00Disazo and polyazo dyes of the types A->K<-B, A->B->K<-C, or the like, prepared by diazotising and coupling
    • C09B33/18Trisazo or higher polyazo dyes
    • C09B33/28Tetrazo dyes of the type A->B->K<-C<-D
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B1/00Optical elements characterised by the material of which they are made; Optical coatings for optical elements
    • G02B1/04Optical elements characterised by the material of which they are made; Optical coatings for optical elements made of organic materials, e.g. plastics
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/30Polarising elements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/133528Polarisers
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B33/00Electroluminescent light sources
    • H05B33/02Details
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K59/00Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
    • H10K59/80Constructional details
    • H10K59/8791Arrangements for improving contrast, e.g. preventing reflection of ambient light

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an achromatic dye-based polarizing element, and an achromatic polarizing plate and a display device using the same.
  • the polarizing element is generally formed on a substrate such as a stretch-oriented film of polyvinyl alcohol or a derivative thereof, a polyene-based film obtained by producing and orienting a polyene by dehydroxation of a polyvinyl chloride film or dehydration of a polyvinyl alcohol-based film, and iodine. It is manufactured by adsorbing and orienting a polyene dye.
  • a polarizing plate obtained by laminating a protective film made of triacetyl cellulose or the like on this polarizing element via an adhesive layer is used in a liquid crystal display device or the like.
  • a polarizing plate using iodine as a dichroic dye is called an iodine-based polarizing plate, while a polarizing plate using a dichroic dye as a dichroic dye, for example, an azo compound having dichroism is a dye-based polarizing plate.
  • dye-based polarizing plates have high heat resistance, high humidity heat durability, and high stability, and are characterized by high color selectivity due to the blending of dyes, while having the same degree of polarization.
  • the transmittance and contrast are low as compared with the iodine-based polarizing plate. Therefore, a polarizing element having high transmittance and high polarization characteristics in addition to maintaining high durability and various color selectivity is desired.
  • the conventional polarizing elements have a positional relationship in which the absorption axis directions of the two polarizing elements are parallel to each other (hereinafter, also referred to as “parallel position”). ), There is a problem that a yellowish white color is exhibited when the white color is exhibited (hereinafter, also referred to as “white display” or “bright display”). In order to improve the problem that the white color becomes yellowish, even if the polarizing element is manufactured by suppressing the yellowish color, the conventional polarizing plate has a position where the absorption axis directions of the two polarizing elements are orthogonal to each other.
  • the polarizing plate In order for the polarizing plate to be achromatic, it is necessary for the transmittance of each wavelength to be a substantially constant value regardless of the wavelength in the parallel position or the orthogonal position, but it has been possible to obtain such a polarizing plate. Was not done.
  • the reason why the hues of white display and black display are different is that the wavelength dependence of the transmittance is not the same in the parallel position and the orthogonal position, and in particular, the transmittance is not constant over the visible light region. Further, the fact that the dichroism is not constant over the visible light region is one of the factors that make it difficult to realize an achromatic polarizing plate.
  • iodine-based polarizing plates using polyvinyl alcohol (hereinafter, also referred to as “PVA”) as a base material and iodine as a dichroic dye generally have 480 nm and 600 nm. Has absorption centered on iodine. Absorption of 480nm is polyiodine I 3 - complex of the PVA, the absorption of 600nm polyiodine I 5 - is said to be due to the complex of the PVA.
  • PVA polyvinyl alcohol
  • Polarization at each wavelength is polyiodine I 5 - towards the polarization-based complex of a PVA (dichroic) is polyiodine I 3 - polarization degree based on the complex of the PVA ( Higher than dichroism). That is, when trying to make the transmittance at the orthogonal position constant at each wavelength, the transmittance at the parallel position is higher at 600 nm than at 480 nm, and a phenomenon that white is colored yellow when displayed in white has occurred. On the contrary, when trying to make the transmittance at the parallel position constant, the transmittance at the orthogonal position is lower at 600 nm than at 480 nm, so that black is colored blue when displayed in black.
  • Patent Document 1 describes a polarizing plate having a neutral coefficient calculated and an absolute value of 0 to 3.
  • Patent Document 2 describes a polarizing film in which the transmittance at 410 nm to 750 nm is within ⁇ 30% of the average value, and the color is adjusted by directly adding a dye, a reactive dye, or an acid dye in addition to iodine. Has been done. Further, as in Patent Document 3, a technique of an achromatic dye-based polarizing plate is also disclosed.
  • the parallel hue obtained from JIS Z 8729 has an a * value of ⁇ 1.67.
  • the b * value is 3.51
  • the hue at the orthogonal position has an a * value of 0.69, but a b * value of -3.40, so that the polarizing plate is blue when displayed in black.
  • the polarizing film of Patent Document 2 is obtained by setting the a value and the b value in the UCS color space measured using only one polarizing film to an absolute value of 2 or less, and two polarizing films are laminated.
  • the average value of the simple substance transmittance of the polarizing film of Patent Document 2 was 31.95% in Example 1 and 31.41% in Example 2, showing low values.
  • the polarizing film of Patent Document 2 since the polarizing film of Patent Document 2 has low transmittance, it does not have sufficient performance in fields where high transmittance and high contrast are required, particularly in fields such as liquid crystal display devices and organic electroluminescence. .. Further, since the polarizing film of Patent Document 2 uses iodine as the main dichroic dye, the color is obtained after the durability test, particularly after the wet heat durability test (for example, an environment of 85 ° C. and a relative humidity of 85%). The change was large and the durability was inferior.
  • the dye-based polarizing plate has excellent durability, but the wavelength dependence differs between the parallel position and the orthogonal position, which is the same as the iodine-based polarizing plate.
  • the sensitivity of human color differs depending on the brightness of light
  • the brightness of the light generated by controlling the polarization from the orthogonal position to the parallel position will be different. Appropriate color correction is required.
  • the achromatic polarizing plate cannot be achieved unless the transmittance is a substantially constant value at each wavelength at each of the parallel position and the orthogonal position and there is no wavelength dependence.
  • the degree of polarization (bicolor ratio) of each wavelength is high and , Must be constant.
  • Patent Document 3 also describes an achromatic polarizing plate at the time of white display and black display, but further improvement in performance is desired.
  • an object of the present invention is a high-performance achromatic polarizing element having high transmittance and high polarization degree and being achromatic in both white display and black display, and an achromatic polarizing plate using the same. It is to provide a display device. Another object is to provide a polarizing element or the like that exhibits high-quality white color when displayed in white.
  • the present inventor has no wavelength dependence on the dichroism due to the combination of the azo compounds of the formulas (1) and (2), and in each of the parallel position and the orthogonal position.
  • the present inventor has found for the first time that wavelength independence in the visible light region can be achieved even with high transmittance, and is higher than the ability to realize high-quality paper-like white, commonly known as paper white.
  • the present invention relates to, but is not limited to: [1] A polarizing element containing an azo compound represented by the formula (1) or a salt thereof and an azo compound represented by the formula (2) or a salt thereof:
  • Ar 1 represents a phenyl group having a substituent or a naphthyl group having a substituent
  • Rr 1 and Rr 2 independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, and an alkoxy of C1 to 4.
  • Ag 1 represents a phenyl group having a substituent or a naphthyl group having a substituent
  • Bg and Cg are independently represented by the following formula (3) or formula (4), whichever is used.
  • Xg 1 is an amino group which may have a substituent, a phenylamino group which may have a substituent, and a phenylazo group which may have a substituent.
  • Rg 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group
  • p 1 represents an integer of 0 to 2.
  • Rg 2 and Rg 3 independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group, respectively.
  • Xg 2 is an amino group which may have a substituent, a phenylamino group which may have a substituent, and a phenylazo group which may have a substituent.
  • Ay 61 represents a sulfo group, a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group of C1 to 4 or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, and Ry 61 to Ry 64 are independent hydrogen atoms and C1 to C4, respectively.
  • Ay 71 and Ay 72 are naphthyl groups which may have a substituent or a phenyl group which may have a substituent, respectively, and s and t are 0 or 0 or t, respectively. It is an integer of 1, and Ry 71 , Ry 72 , Ry 77 , and Ry 78 are independently hydrogen atoms, C1 to 4 alkyl groups, and C1 to 4 alkoxy groups, and Ry 73 to Ry 76 are respectively.
  • one of Ry 81 and Ry 82 is a C1 to 4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group, a carboxy group, or a sulfo group, and the other is a hydrogen atom, a sulfo group, a carboxy group, or a sulfo group.
  • an alkoxy group of C1-4 an alkyl group of C1-4, an alkoxy group of C1-4, a halogen atom, a nitro group, an amino group, an alkyl-substituted amino group of C1-4, or an alkyl-substituted acylamino group of C1-4.
  • Ay 71 and Ay 72 in the above formula (7) may each independently have a substituent selected from the group consisting of a hydroxy group, a C1 to 4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group, and a sulfo group.
  • the average transmittance of 420 nm to 480 nm and the average transmittance of 520 nm to 590 nm are the transmittances of each wavelength obtained by stacking two polarizing elements so that their absorption axis directions are parallel to each other.
  • the difference is 2.5% or less as an absolute value
  • the difference between the average transmittance of 520 nm to 590 nm and the average transmittance of 600 nm to 640 nm is 3.0% or less as an absolute value.
  • the polarizing element according to any one of the preceding items [13].
  • the polarizing element according to any one of the above items [1] to [14] (a * -s indicates an a * value of a single substance, b * -s indicates a b * value of a single substance, and a * -P indicates the a * value in the parallel position, and b * -p indicates the b * in the parallel position). [16]
  • the single transmittance of the polarizing element after correction of the luminosity factor is 35% to 45%.
  • the average transmittance of each wavelength of 520 nm to 590 nm, which is obtained by arranging two polarizing elements on top of each other so that their absorption axis directions are parallel to each other, is 28% to 45%.
  • the polarizing element according to any one of the preceding items [15]. [17] In the transmittance of each wavelength obtained in a state where two polarizing elements are stacked and arranged so that their absorption axis directions are orthogonal to each other.
  • the difference between the average transmittance of 420 nm to 480 nm and the average transmittance of 520 nm to 590 nm is 1.0% or less as an absolute value, and the difference between the average transmittance of 520 nm to 590 nm and the average transmittance of 600 nm to 640 nm. Is 1.0% or less as an absolute value,
  • the absolute values of are 2.0 or less (-2.0 ⁇ a * -c ⁇ 2.0, -2.0 ⁇ b * -c ⁇ 2.0), from the previous item [1] to the previous item [18]. ] (A * -c indicates an a * value at an orthogonal position, and b * -c indicates a b * at an orthogonal position).
  • a polarizing plate including the polarizing element according to any one of the above items [1] to [20] and a transparent protective layer provided on one side or both sides of the polarizing element.
  • a display device including the polarizing element according to any one of the preceding items [1] to [20] or the polarizing plate according to the preceding item [21].
  • the present invention provides a high-performance achromatic polarizing element having high transmittance and high degree of polarization and being achromatic in both white display and black display, and an achromatic polarizing plate and a display device using the same. can do.
  • the polarizing element or the like of the present invention exhibits a high-quality white color when displayed in white.
  • azo compound or salt thereof may be simply referred to as “azo compound” unless it clearly represents a free form.
  • the "substituent” includes a hydrogen atom for convenience.
  • the phrase “may have a substituent” means that a case without a substituent is also included.
  • the "phenyl group which may have a substituent” includes a simple phenyl group which is not substituted and a phenyl group which has a substituent.
  • alkyl group of C1 to 4 examples include linear alkyl groups such as methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group and n-butyl group, sec-butyl group and tert.
  • -A branched alkyl group such as a butyl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group such as a vinyl group, and the like can be mentioned.
  • alkoxy group of C1 to 4" examples include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, an n-butoxy group, a sec-butoxy group, a tert-butoxy group and the like.
  • the polarizing element according to the present invention includes an azo compound represented by the above formula (1) or a salt thereof, and an azo compound represented by the above formula (2) or a salt thereof.
  • the polarizing element according to the present invention may further optionally contain one or more organic dyes having a structure other than the azo compound.
  • the azo compound represented by the above formula (6) or the formula (7) may be further contained, and the formula (1) and the formula (2) and the formula (6), or the formula (1) and the formula (2).
  • And formula (7) are preferably included.
  • the above-mentioned polarizing element preferably uses a dichroic dye, particularly a film obtained by forming a hydrophilic polymer capable of adsorbing an azo compound, as a base material.
  • the hydrophilic polymer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include polyvinyl alcohol-based resins, amylose-based resins, starch-based resins, cellulosic resins, and polyacrylate-based resins.
  • the hydrophilic polymer is most preferably a polyvinyl alcohol-based resin or a derivative thereof from the viewpoint of dyeability, processability, crosslinkability and the like of the dichroic dye.
  • a polarizing element can be produced by adsorbing an azo compound or a salt thereof on a base material and applying an orientation treatment such as stretching.
  • Ar 1 represents a phenyl group having a substituent or a naphthyl group having a substituent
  • Rr 1 and Rr 2 are independently hydrogen atoms, alkyl groups C1 to 4 and alkoxys C1 to 4. It represents a group, a sulfo group, a halogen atom, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group, and at least one of Rr 1 and Rr 2 represents a group other than the hydrogen atom.
  • Rr 3 to Rr 6 independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group, where j indicates 0 or 1, and Xr.
  • Reference numeral 1 is an amino group which may have a substituent, a phenylamino group which may have a substituent, a phenylazo group which may have a substituent, and a benzoyl group which may have a substituent. , Or a benzoylamino group which may have a substituent.
  • the phenyl group having a substituent in Ar 1 of the above formula (1) or the naphthyl group having a substituent will be described.
  • Ar 1 is a phenyl group having a substituent
  • the phenyl group has two or more substituents, at least one of the substituents is a sulfo group or a carboxy group, and the other substituents are a sulfo group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group of C1 to 4 and C1.
  • a alkoxy group of to 4 and a C1 to 4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group, a nitro group, a benzoyl group, an amino group, an acetylamino group, or an alkylamino group-substituted amino group of C1 to 4 is preferable, and the other substituent is More preferably, it is a sulfo group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a carboxy group, a nitro group, a benzoyl group or an amino group, and particularly preferably a sulfo group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group and a benzoyl group.
  • the alkoxy group of C1 to C4 having a sulfo group a linear alkoxy group is preferable, and the substituent of the sulfo group is preferably an alkoxy group terminal, more preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group and a 4-sulfobutoxy group. , Particularly preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group.
  • the number of sulfo groups contained in the phenyl group is preferably 1 or 2, and the substitution position is not particularly limited. However, when the substitution position of the amide group is the 1-position, only the 4-position is a combination of the 2-position and the 4-position. And a combination of 3rd and 5th positions is preferable.
  • Ar 1 is a naphthyl group having a substituent
  • a sulfo group at least one of these substituents, and as the other substituent, a sulfo group, a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, or a C1 to 4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group is preferable.
  • the alkoxy group of C1 to C4 having a sulfo group a linear alkoxy group is preferable, and the substituent of the sulfo group is preferably an alkoxy group terminal, more preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group and a 4-sulfobutoxy group. Particularly preferred is a 3-sulfopropoxy group.
  • the position of the sulfo group on the naphthyl group is preferably a combination of the 4-position and the 8-position and a combination of the 6-position and the 8-position when the substitution position of the amide group is the 2-position. A combination of 6th and 8th positions is more preferable.
  • the number of sulfo groups contained in the naphthyl group is 3, a combination of the 3-position, the 6-position and the 8-position is particularly preferable as the substitution position of the sulfo group.
  • Rr 1 and Rr 2 independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, a sulfo group, a halogen atom, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group, respectively. At least one of Rr 1 and Rr 2 represents a group other than the hydrogen atom. It is preferable that Rr 1 and Rr 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, a sulfo group, and a chlorine atom, and a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, and methoxy.
  • the alkoxy group of C1 to C4 having a sulfo group a linear alkoxy group is preferable, and the substituent of the sulfo group is preferably an alkoxy group terminal, more preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group and a 4-sulfobutoxy group. However, it is particularly preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group.
  • Rr 1 and Rr 2 are the above groups other than the hydrogen atom, the substitution positions are only the 2nd position, 3 only, the 2nd position and the 5th position, and the 2nd position and 6 when the substitution position of the amide group is the 1st position.
  • the 3-position and the 5-position can be mentioned, only the 2-position is preferable, and only the 3-position is preferable, and it is particularly preferable that the position is replaced with the 2-position.
  • Rr 3 to Rr 6 independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group.
  • Rr 3 to Rr 6 are each independently, preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, and more preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or a methoxy group.
  • the alkoxy group of C1 to C4 having a sulfo group a linear alkoxy group is preferable, and the substituent of the sulfo group is preferably an alkoxy group terminal, more preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group and a 4-sulfobutoxy group. Particularly preferred is a 3-sulfopropoxy group.
  • substitution position when the substitution position of the azo group on the amide group side is the 1-position, only the 2-position, the 3-only, the 2-position and the 5-position, the 2-position and the 6-position, the 3-position and the 5-position, and the 3-position and the 6-position.
  • combinations of 2nd place only, 3rd place only, 2nd place and 5th place, and 3rd place and 6th place are preferable.
  • the above j indicates 0 or 1.
  • color control becomes easy, and according to JIS Z8781-4: 2013, the absolute values of the a * value and b * value obtained when measuring the transmittance when using natural light are the polarizing element 2.
  • This is a preferable form for color adjustment because it is easy to adjust both of the sheets to 2.0 or less in a state where the sheets are stacked so that their absorption axis directions are parallel to each other.
  • j When j is 1, it shows a high degree of polarization, which is one of the preferable forms for improving the performance.
  • the Xr 1 may have an amino group which may have a substituent, a phenylamino group which may have a substituent, a phenylazo group which may have a substituent, and a substituent. Indicates a good benzoyl group, or a benzoylamino group which may have a substituent.
  • the amino group which may have a substituent preferably comprises a group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1-4, an alkoxy group of C1-4, a sulfo group, an amino group, and an alkylamino group of C1-4.
  • An amino group having one or two substituents of choice more preferably a group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, an amino group, and an alkylamino group of C1-4.
  • the phenylamino group which may have a substituent preferably comprises a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1-4, an alkoxy group of C1-4, a sulfo group, an amino group, and an alkylamino group of C1-4.
  • the benzoyl group which may have a substituent is preferably a benzoyl group having one selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, a sulfo group, an amino group, and a carboxyethylamino group.
  • the benzoylamino group which may have a substituent is preferably a benzoylamino group having one selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an amino group, and a carboxyethylamino group.
  • the phenylazo group which may have a substituent is preferably selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, an amino group and a carboxyethylamino group. It is a phenylazo group having 1 to 3 groups.
  • Xr 1 is preferably an amino group which may have a substituent, a benzoylamino group which may have a substituent, and a phenylamino group which may have a substituent, and more preferably. Is an amino group which may have a substituent and a phenylamino group which may have a substituent.
  • the position of the substituent is not particularly limited, but when Xr 1 is a group having a phenyl group, one of the substituents is at the p-position with respect to the bond position indirectly bonded to the naphthalene skeleton represented by the formula (1). Substitution is particularly preferable, and as a specific example, in the case of a phenylamino group, it is preferable that the substituent is at the p-position with respect to the amino group.
  • Examples of the method for obtaining the azo compound represented by the above formula (1) include, but are not limited to, the methods described in Patent Documents 4 to 6 and the like.
  • Ag 1 represents a phenyl group having a substituent or a naphthyl group having a substituent.
  • Ag 1 is a phenyl group having a substituent, it is preferable to have at least one sulfo group or carboxy group as the substituent.
  • the phenyl group has two or more substituents
  • at least one of the substituents is a sulfo group or a carboxy group
  • the other substituent is a sulfo group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, C1 to It is preferably an alkoxy group of 4, a C1 to 4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group, a nitro group, an amino group, an acetylamino group, or a C1 to 4 alkylamino group substituted amino group.
  • the other substituent is more preferably a sulfo group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a carboxy group, a nitro group, or an amino group, and particularly preferably a sulfo group, a methyl group, a methoxy group or an ethoxy group. It is a group or a carboxy group.
  • a linear alkoxy group is preferable, and the substituent of the sulfo group is preferably an alkoxy group terminal, more preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group and a 4-sulfobutoxy group, and particularly.
  • the number of substituents of the phenyl group is preferably 1 or 2, and the substitution position is not particularly limited. However, when the position of the azo group is the 1-position, only the 4-position is the combination of the 2-position and the 4-position, and the 3-position. A combination of 5 and 5 is preferable.
  • Ag 1 is a naphthyl group having a substituent, it is preferable to have at least one sulfo group as the substituent.
  • the naphthyl group has two or more substituents
  • at least one of the substituents is a sulfo group, a hydroxy group, a C1 to 4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group
  • the other substituents include a sulfo group.
  • C1-4 alkoxy groups having a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, or a sulfo group are preferable. It is particularly preferable that the naphthyl group has two or more sulfo groups as a substituent.
  • the alkoxy group of C1 to C4 having a sulfo group a linear alkoxy group is preferable, and the substituent of the sulfo group is preferably an alkoxy group terminal, more preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group and a 4-sulfobutoxy group. Particularly preferred is a 3-sulfopropoxy group.
  • the substitution position of the sulfo group is preferably a combination of the 4-position and the 8-position and a combination of the 6-position and the 8-position when the position of the azo group is the 2-position. , A combination of 6th and 8th positions is more preferable.
  • the substitution position of the sulfo group is preferably a combination of the 3-position, the 6-position and the 8-position when the substitution position of the azo group is the 2-position.
  • Bg and Cg in the above formula (2) are independently represented by the above formula (3) or the above formula (4), but either Bg or Cg is represented by the above formula (3).
  • Rg 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group, and preferably a hydrogen atom, C1 to 4 Alkyl group or C1-4 alkoxy group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or a methoxy group.
  • a particularly preferable Rg 1 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methoxy group.
  • the alkoxy group of C1 to C4 having a sulfo group a linear alkoxy group is preferable, and the substituent of the sulfo group is preferably an alkoxy group terminal, more preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group and a 4-sulfobutoxy group, and particularly. It is preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group.
  • the substitution position of Rg 1 is preferably the 2-position or the 3-position, and more preferably the 3-position, with the azo group substituted on the Ag 1 side as the 1-position.
  • p 1 represents an integer of 0 to 2.
  • the substitution position of the sulfo group is preferably 6-position or 7-position, and more preferably 6-position.
  • Rg 2 and Rg 3 independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group, and hydrogen is preferable.
  • substitution positions of Rg 2 or Rg 3 the azo group substituted on the Ag 1 side in the above formula (2) is used as the 1-position, and only the 2-position, the 5-position, the 2-position, the 5-position, and the 3-position are used.
  • the 5th, 2nd and 6th positions, or the combination of the 3rd and 6th positions can be applied, but only the 2nd position, the 5th position, the 2nd and 5th positions are preferable. Note that only the 2-position and the 5-position indicate that only the 2-position or the 5-position has one substituent other than a hydrogen atom.
  • Xg 1 in the above formula (2) includes an amino group which may have a substituent, a phenylamino group which may have a substituent, a phenylazo group which may have a substituent, and a substituent. Indicates a benzoyl group which may have a benzoyl group or a benzoylamino group which may have a substituent.
  • Xg 1 is preferably an amino group which may have a substituent or a phenylamino group which may have a substituent, and more preferably a phenylamino group which may have a substituent. is there.
  • the amino group which may have a substituent is preferably one or 2 selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a methoxy group, a sulfo group, an amino group, and an alkylamino group of C1-4. It is an amino group having one, more preferably an amino group having one or two hydrogen atoms, a methyl group and a sulfo group.
  • the phenylamino group which may have a substituent preferably comprises a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1-4, an alkoxy group of C1-4, a sulfo group, an amino group, and an alkylamino group of C1-4.
  • the phenylazo group preferably has 1 to 3 selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, an amino group, a hydroxy group and a carboxyethylamino group. It is a phenylazo group.
  • the benzoyl group which may have a substituent is preferably a benzoyl group having one substituent selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an amino group, and a carboxyethylamino group.
  • the benzoylamino group which may have a substituent is preferably a benzoylamino group having one substituent selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an amino group, and a carboxyethylamino group.
  • the position of the substituent is not particularly limited, but when Xg 1 is a group having a phenyl group, one of the substituents is at the p-position with respect to the bond position indirectly bonded to the naphthalene skeleton represented by the formula (2).
  • Xg 1 is a group having a phenyl group
  • one of the substituents is at the p-position with respect to the bond position indirectly bonded to the naphthalene skeleton represented by the formula (2).
  • a substituent at the p-position with respect to the amino group in the case of a phenylamino group, it is preferable that there is a substituent at the p-position with respect to the amino group.
  • the azo compound represented by the above formula (2) or a salt thereof is preferably the azo compound represented by the above formula (5) or a salt thereof because the performance is particularly improved.
  • Ag 2 represents the same as Ag 1 in the formula (2).
  • Rg 4 and Rg 5 independently represent the same as Rg 1 in the formula (3).
  • Xg 2 represents the same as Xg 1 in the formula (2).
  • p 2 and p 3 each independently represent the same as p 1 in equation (2). In particular, it is preferable that p 2 and p 3 are independently 1 or 2, respectively, in order to improve the polarization characteristics.
  • the content of the azo compound represented by the above formula (2) or a salt thereof is 0.01 to 5000 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the content of the azo compound of the above formula (1). It is preferably 0.1 to 3000 parts by mass, 10 to 1000 parts by mass, and even more preferably 40 to 400 parts by mass.
  • the azo compound represented by the above formula (2) or a salt thereof can be synthesized by the methods described in, for example, Patent Documents 7 to 12, but is not limited thereto.
  • azo compound represented by the above formula (2) include, for example, C.I. I. Direct Blue 34, C.I. I. Direct Blue 69, C.I. I. Direct Blue 70, C.I. I. Direct Blue 71, C.I. I. Direct Blue 72, C.I. I. Direct Blue 75, C.I. I. Direct Blue 78, C.I. I. Direct Blue 81, C.I. I. Direct Blue 82, C.I. I. Direct Blue 83, C.I. I. Direct Blue 186, C.I. I. Direct Blue 258, Benzo Fast Chrome Blue FG (CI 34225), Benzo Fast Blue BN (CI 34120), C.I. I. Examples thereof include azo compounds such as Direct Green 51.
  • the polarizing element has higher contrast, higher transmittance and higher degree of polarization than the conventional achromatic polarizing plate by incorporating the azo compound represented by the above formula (1) and the above formula (2) in combination.
  • achromatic color can be realized in both white display and black display.
  • high-quality paper-like white commonly known as paper white
  • paper white can be realized when white is displayed.
  • the azo compounds represented by the formulas (1) and (2) in addition to the azo compounds represented by the formulas (1) and (2), the azo compounds represented by the above formula (6) or the formula (7). It is preferable that the compound is further contained.
  • the azo compound represented by the above formula (6) or formula (7) particularly affects the transmittance at 400 to 500 nm.
  • the transmittance and the degree of polarization (contrast) on the short wavelength side of 400 to 500 nm affect the bluening of black when displaying black and the yellowing of white when displaying white.
  • the azo compound represented by the formula (6) or the formula (7) improves the polarization characteristics (dichroism) of 400 to 500 nm while suppressing the decrease in the transmittance on the short wavelength side in the parallel position of the polarizing element. It is possible to further reduce the yellowishness when displaying white and the bluishness when displaying black.
  • the polarizing element is more achromatic in the range of the single transmittance after the luminosity factor correction in the range of 35 to 66%. It is preferable because it exhibits chromaticity, expresses a higher-quality paper-like white color when displayed in white, further improves the degree of polarization, and expresses a more achromatic black color when displayed in black.
  • Ay 61 is a sulfo group, a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group of C1 to 4 or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, preferably a sulfo group or a carboxy group.
  • Ry 61 to Ry 64 are C1 to 4 alkoxy groups having hydrogen atoms, sulfo groups, C1 to 4 alkyl groups, C1 to 4 alkoxy groups, and sulfo groups, respectively, preferably hydrogen atoms and sulfo groups. It is a group, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, and more preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or a methoxy group.
  • k represents an integer of 1 to 3.
  • the content of the azo compound represented by the above formula (6) or a salt thereof is 0.01 to 300 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the content of the azo compound of the formula (1). It is preferable, more preferably 0.1 to 200 parts by mass, and even more preferably 30 to 200 parts by mass.
  • the azo compound represented by the formula (6) or a salt thereof can be synthesized by the method described in, for example, WO2007 / 138980, but commercially available ones can also be obtained.
  • Specific examples of the azo compound represented by the formula (6) include, for example, C.I. I. Direct Yellow 4, C.I. I. Direct Yellow 12, C.I. I. Direct Yellow 72, and C.I. I. There are, but are not limited to, Direct Orange 39 and azo compounds having a stilbene structure described in WO2007 / 138980 and the like.
  • Ay 71 and Ay 72 are naphthyl groups which may have a substituent or a phenyl group which may have a substituent, respectively, and s and t are 0 or 0 or t, respectively.
  • R 71 , Ry 72 , Ry 77 , and Ry 78 are independent hydrogen atoms
  • Ry 73 to Ry 76 are independent hydrogen atoms, respectively. It is an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, and an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group. Either s or t is preferably 1 in order to improve the polarization characteristics.
  • the phenyl group which may have a substituent is preferably a sulfo group, a carboxy group, a C1 to 4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group, a C1 to 4 alkyl group, a C1 to 4 alkoxy group, a halogen group, or a nitro.
  • the phenyl group has two or more substituents
  • at least one of the substituents is a sulfo group, or a carboxy group, or a C1-4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group
  • the other substituent is a sulfo group
  • Hydrogen atom alkyl group of C1-4, alkoxy group of C1-4, alkoxy group of C1-4 having sulfo group, carboxy group, chloro group, bromo group, nitro group, amino group, alkyl substituted amino of C1-4 It is preferably a group or an alkyl-substituted acylamino group of C1-4.
  • substituents are more preferably a sulfo group, a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfoethoxy group, a sulfopropoxy group, a sulfobutoxy group, a chloro group, a nitro group, or It is an amino group, particularly preferably a sulfo group, a carboxy group, a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a methoxy group, a sulfoethoxy group, a sulfopropoxy group, or a sulfobutoxy group.
  • the substitution position is not particularly limited, but only the 2-position, the 4-position only, the combination of the 2-position and the 6-position, the combination of the 2-position and the 4-position, and the combination of the 3-position and the 5-position are preferable. Particularly preferred are 2-position only, 4-position only, combination of 2-position and 4-position, or combination of 3-position and 5-position. In addition, only the 2-position and only the 4-position indicate that only the 2-position or the 4-position has one substituent other than the hydrogen atom.
  • the phenyl group which may have a substituent is preferably represented by the following formula (8). * In the following formula (8) indicates the bonding position of the terminal amide group in the above formula (7) with the NH site.
  • one of Ry 81 and Ry 82 is a sulfo group, a carboxy group, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group, and the other is a C1 having a hydrogen atom, a sulfo group, a carboxy group, or a sulfo group.
  • one of Ry 81 and Ry 82 is a sulfo group or a carboxy group, and the other is a hydrogen atom, a sulfo group, a carboxy group, a methyl group, or a methoxy group.
  • the naphthyl group which may have a substituent has one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of a hydroxy group, a C1-4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group, and a sulfo group. It is preferably a naphthyl group which may be used.
  • the naphthyl group which may have a substituent is preferably a naphthyl group represented by the following formula (9). * In the following formula (9) indicates the bonding position of the terminal amide group of the above formula (7) with the NH site.
  • Ry 91 is a C1-4 alkoxy group or a sulfo group having a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group and a sulfo group.
  • f is an integer of 1 to 3.
  • the position of the sulfo group may be present in any benzene nucleus of the naphthalene ring.
  • Ry 91 is a hydrogen atom and f is 2.
  • the alkoxy group of C1 to C4 having a sulfo group a linear alkoxy group is preferable, and the substituent of the sulfo group is preferably an alkoxy group terminal.
  • the C1-4 alkoxy groups having a sulfo group are more preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group and a 4-sulfobutoxy group.
  • the position of the substituent of the naphthyl group is not particularly limited, but when the substitution position of the azo group is the 2-position, when there are two substituents, the 4-position and the 8-position, the 5-position and the 7-position, and so on. Alternatively, a combination of the 6-position and the 8-position is preferable, and when the number of substituents is 3, the 3-position, the 5-position and the 7-position, and the 3-position, the 6-position and the 8-position are preferable.
  • Ry 71 , Ry 72 , Ry 77 , and Ry 78 are independently hydrogen atoms, C1 to 4 alkoxy groups, and C1 to 4 alkyl groups, respectively. Preferred are a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a methoxy group, and an ethoxy group.
  • Ry 73 to Ry 76 are independent alkoxy groups of C1 to 4 having a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, and a sulfo group, respectively.
  • Ry 73 to Ry 76 are each independently, preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a 3-sulfopropoxy group, or a 4-sulfobutoxy group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom. It is a methyl group, an ethyl group, a methoxy group, or a 3-sulfopropoxy group.
  • the positions of Ry 73 to Ry 76 include 2-position only, 5-position only, 2-position and 6-position combination, 2-position and 5-position combination, and 3-position and 5-position combination.
  • only the 2-position and only the 5-position indicate that only the 2-position or the 5-position has one substituent other than the hydrogen atom.
  • the azo compound represented by the formula (7) is preferably represented by the following formula (10). Note that Ay 71 , Ay 72 , Ry 71 to Ry 78 , s, and t are the same as those described in the equation (7).
  • the azo compound represented by the above formula (7) or a salt thereof is diazotized and coupled according to a usual method for producing an azo dye as described in Non-Patent Document 2, and is described in Patent Document 13. It can be produced by reacting with a azo agent.
  • aromatic amines which may have a substituent as represented by the following formula (A) are represented by an acid represented by the following formula (B) by the same method as in Patent Document 13.
  • the reaction with chloride is carried out, followed by a reduction reaction to obtain aminobenzoylanilines represented by the following formula (C).
  • Ay 71 represents the same as that in the above formula (7).
  • Ry 71 and Ry 72 are the same as those in the above formula (7).
  • Ay 71 , Ry 71 and Ry 72 are the same as those in the above formula (7).
  • aminobenzoylanilines having a substituent represented by the above formula (C) are diazotized by the same method as in Non-Patent Document 2, coupled with the anilines of the following formula (D), and the following formula (E) is used. Obtain the monoazoamino compound shown.
  • aromatic amines which may have a substituent as represented by the following formula (F) are reacted with the acid chloride represented by the following formula (G) by the same method as in Patent Document 1, and subsequently reduced.
  • the reaction is carried out to obtain aminobenzoylanilines represented by the following formula (H).
  • Ay 72 represents the same as that in the above formula (7).
  • R 77 and Ry 78 represent the same as those in the above formula (7).
  • Ay 72 , Ry 77 and Ry 78 are the same as those in formula (7) above.
  • aminobenzoylanilines having a substituent represented by the above formula (H) are diazotized by the same method as in Non-Patent Document 2, coupled with the anilines of the following formula (I), and the following formula (J) is used. Obtain the monoazoamino compound shown.
  • Ry 75 and Ry 76 represent the same as those in the above formula (7).
  • Ay 72 and Ry 75 to Ry 78 are the same as those in the above formula (7).
  • Ay 72 represents the same as in formula (7) above.
  • Ay 72 , Ry 75 and Ry 76 are the same as those in the above formula (7).
  • the azo compound of the formula (7) is obtained by reacting the monoazoamino compound (E) and the monoazoamino compound (L) with phenylchloroformate, which is a ureidating agent.
  • aromatic amines which may have a substituent represented by the following formula (M) are the same as in Non-Patent Document 2.
  • the monoazoamino compound represented by the following formula (N) is obtained by diazotizing by the method of the above method and coupling with the anilines of the above formula (D).
  • Ay 71 represents the same as that in the above formula (7).
  • Ay 71 , Ry 73 , and Ry 74 represent the same as those in the above formula (7).
  • the azo compound of the formula (7) is obtained by reacting the monoazoamino compound (J) and the monoazoamino compound (N) with phenylchloroformate, which is a ureidating agent.
  • the diazotization step is carried out by the normal method of mixing a mineral acid aqueous solution such as hydrochloric acid or sulfuric acid of the diazo component or a nitrite such as sodium nitrite with a turbid solution, or a neutral or weakly alkaline aqueous solution of the diazo component. This is done by the reverse method of adding nitrate and mixing it with mineral acid.
  • the temperature of diazotization is preferably ⁇ 10 to 40 ° C.
  • the coupling step with anilines is carried out by mixing an acidic aqueous solution such as hydrochloric acid or acetic acid with each of the above diazo solutions at a temperature of ⁇ 10 to 40 ° C. and under acidic conditions of pH 2 to 7.
  • the monoazoamino compound (E), monoazoamino compound (J), monoazoamino compound (L), and monoazoamino compound (N) obtained by coupling are precipitated by acidification or salting out and filtered out.
  • the solution or suspension can be used as it is to proceed to the next step. If the diazonium salt is sparingly soluble and is in suspension, it can be filtered and used as a press cake in the next coupling step.
  • the specific conditions of the ureidoation reaction using phenyl chloroformate are preferably a temperature of 10 to 90 ° C. and a pH of 3 to 11, more preferably 20 to 80 ° C., according to the production method shown on page 57 of Patent Document 13.
  • the pH is 4 to 10, particularly preferably 20 to 70 ° C. and pH 6 to 9.
  • the ureidating agent include phenyl chloroformate, phosgene, triphosgene, ethyl chloroformate, butyl chloroformate, isobutyl chloroformate, 4-nitrophenyl chloroformate, 4-fluorophenyl chloroformate, 4-chlorophenyl chloroformate, and chloroformic acid.
  • the ureidating agent is preferably phenyl chloroformate, 4-nitrophenyl chloroformate, 4-chlorophenyl chloroformate, diphenyl carbonate, bis (4-nitrophenyl) carbonate, and more preferably phenyl chloroformate, 4 chloroformic acid -Nitrophenyl.
  • the obtained azo compound of the formula (7) is precipitated by salting out, filtered and taken out. If purification is required, salting out may be repeated or precipitated from water using an organic solvent.
  • organic solvent used for purification include water-soluble organic solvents such as alcohols such as methanol and ethanol, and ketones such as acetone.
  • the aromatic amines represented by Ay 71- NH 2 and Ay 72- NH 2 which are starting materials for synthesizing the azo compound represented by the formula (7), are naphthylamines or anilines.
  • naphthylamines it is preferable to use naphthylamines having one or more selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atoms, hydroxy groups, C1 to 4 alkoxy groups having a sulfo group, and sulfo groups.
  • naphthylamines include 4-aminonaphthalenesulfonic acid, 7-aminonaphthalene-3-sulfonic acid, 1-aminonaphthalene-6-sulfonic acid, 1-aminonaphthalene-7-sulfonic acid, and 7-aminonaphthalene-1.
  • naphthylamines having a sulfo group and a C1-4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group examples include 7-amino-3- (3-sulfopropoxy) naphthalene-1-sulfonic acid and 7-amino-3- (4-amino-3- (4-).
  • anilins examples include 4-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 3-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 2-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 4-aminobenzoic acid, 2-amino-5-methylbenzenesulfonic acid, 2-amino-5-ethylbenzene.
  • the aromatic amines (D) and (I) that are the primary couplers include aniline, 2-methylaniline, 2-ethylaniline, 2-propylaniline, 2-butylaniline, 3-methylaniline, and 3-ethylaniline.
  • the content of the azo compound represented by the above formula (7) or a salt thereof is 0.01 to 300 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the content of the azo compound of the formula (1). It is preferable, more preferably 0.1 to 200 parts by mass, and even more preferably 30 to 200 parts by mass.
  • the azo compound represented by the above formula (1), formula (2), formula (6), or formula (7) may be in the free form or in the salt form, respectively.
  • the salt can be, for example, an alkali metal salt such as a lithium salt, a sodium salt, and a potassium salt, or an organic salt such as an ammonium salt or an alkylamine salt.
  • the salt is preferably a sodium salt.
  • the polarizing element contains an azo compound represented by the formulas (1) and (2), and can optionally further contain one or more organic dyes having a structure other than the azo compound.
  • the polarizing element can have performances such as a * value and b * value, which are chromaticities in a preferable range described later, a single transmittance after correction of luminosity factor, and an average transmittance in a specific wavelength band. For example, the transmittance of each wavelength of the polarizing element alone can be kept constant.
  • the transmittance can be made constant even in the parallel position of each wavelength, that is, an achromatic color can be provided in the hue of the parallel position when the absorption axes of the two polarizing elements are parallel. Further, the transmittance of each wavelength can be made constant at the same time even in the orthogonal position, that is, it is possible to provide an achromatic hue in the hue of the orthogonal position when the absorption axes of the two polarizing elements are orthogonal.
  • the polarizing element of the present application contains the formulas (1) and (2), and optionally an organic dye having another structure, for example, an azo compound represented by the formula (6) or (7). Not only can a polarizing element having high transmittance and high contrast, that is, a high degree of polarization can be provided, but also a polarizing element having an achromatic hue can be provided.
  • the compounding ratio of the azo compound in the polarizing element is further adjusted so that the transmittance and the chromaticity are in the preferable ranges described later in the content of each of the azo compounds described above.
  • the performance of the polarizing element includes not only the compounding ratio of each azo compound in the polarizing element, but also various factors such as the degree of swelling and stretching ratio of the base material that adsorbs the azo compound, the dyeing time, the dyeing temperature, the pH at the time of dyeing, and the influence of salts. It changes depending on various factors. Therefore, the blending ratio of each azo compound can be determined according to the degree of swelling of the base material, the temperature at the time of dyeing, the time, the pH, the type of salt, the concentration of salt, and the stretching ratio.
  • the transmittance after the luminosity factor correction is a transmittance corrected to the luminosity factor of the human eye, which is obtained according to JIS Z 8722: 2009.
  • the transmittance of each wavelength used for correction is measured every 5 nm or 10 nm for each wavelength of 400 to 700 nm using a C light source (2 degree field) for a measurement sample (for example, a polarizing element or a polarizing plate). It can be obtained by measuring the spectral transmittance and correcting the visual sensitivity according to JIS Z 8722: 2009.
  • the transmittance after the visual sensitivity correction As for the transmittance after the visual sensitivity correction, the single transmittance after the visual sensitivity correction when the polarizing element or the polarizing plate was measured by itself, the polarizing element, or two polarizing plates were used, and each absorption axis was made parallel.
  • the transmittance at time is corrected to visual sensitivity
  • the parallel position transmittance after correction of visual sensitivity and the transmittance when each absorption axis is orthogonalized using two polarizing elements or polarizing plates are corrected to visual sensitivity. There is orthogonal transmittance after correction of visual sensitivity.
  • the polarization element preferably has a difference in average transmittance between specific wavelength bands of a predetermined value or less.
  • the average transmittance is the average value of the transmittance of each wavelength in a specific wavelength band.
  • Wavelength bands 420 nm to 480 nm, 520 nm to 590 nm, and 600 nm to 640 nm are the main wavelength bands based on the color matching function used in the calculation when showing colors in JIS Z 8781-4: 2013. Specifically, in the XYZ color matching function of JIS Z 8701, which is the basis of JIS Z 8781-4: 2013, x ( ⁇ ) having a maximum value of 600 nm and y ( ⁇ ) having a maximum value of 550 nm are set to 455 nm.
  • each wavelength showing a value of 20 or more is each wavelength band of 420 nm to 480 nm, 520 nm to 590 nm, and 600 nm to 640 nm.
  • the transmittance obtained by measuring each wavelength in a state where two polarizing elements are stacked so as to be parallel to each other in the absorption axis direction (in bright display or white display) is measured in "parallel transmission" of each wavelength. Also called “rate”. Further, the average transmittance of each wavelength from ⁇ nm to ⁇ nm is also referred to as “AT ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ”. Regarding the parallel transmittance of each wavelength of the polarizing element of the present invention, the difference between AT 420-480 and AT 520-590 is preferably 2.5% or less, more preferably 1.8% or less as an absolute value. , More preferably 1.5% or less, and particularly preferably 1.0% or less.
  • the difference between AT 520-590 and AT 600-640 is preferably 3.0% or less as an absolute value, more preferably 2.0% or less, still more preferably. It is 1.5% or less, particularly preferably 1.0% or less.
  • Such a polarizing element can display a high-quality paper-like white color in a parallel position.
  • the transmittance obtained by measuring each wavelength in a state where two polarizing elements are stacked so that the absorption axis directions are orthogonal to each other (when displayed in black or when displayed in dark) is the "orthogonal transmission" of each wavelength. Also called “rate”.
  • the difference between AT 420-480 and AT 520-590 is 1.0% or less as an absolute value, and AT 520-590 and AT 600-640.
  • the difference from is preferably 1.0% or less as an absolute value.
  • Such a polarizing element can display an achromatic black color at an orthogonal position.
  • the difference between AT 420-480 and AT 520-590 as an absolute value is preferably 0.6% or less, more preferably 0.3% or less, still more preferably 0. It is 1% or less.
  • the difference between AT 520-590 and AT 600-640 as an absolute value is preferably 1.0% or less, more preferably 0.6% or less, still more preferably 0.3% or less, particularly. It is preferably 0.1%.
  • the average transmittances of the single transmittance, the parallel position transmittance, and the orthogonal position transmittance at each wavelength of the wavelength bands of 380 nm to 420 nm, 480 nm to 520 nm, and 640 nm to 780 nm are the above wavelength bands of 420 nm to 480 nm and 520 nm.
  • the average transmittance at ⁇ 590 nm and 600 nm to 640 nm is adjusted as described above, it is preferable that the average transmittance is adjusted to some extent, although the influence on the hue of the polarizing element is not large.
  • AT is preferable that the difference is not more than 15% of the 380-420 and AT 420-480, AT 480-520 a difference between the AT 420-480 15% or less, AT 480- It is preferable that the difference between 520 and AT 520-590 is 15% or less, and the difference between AT 640-780 and AT 600-640 is 20% or less.
  • the polarizing element preferably has a single transmittance of 35% to 66% after the luminosity factor correction.
  • the single transmittance after the luminosity factor correction is the transmittance of one measurement sample (for example, a polarizing element or a polarizing plate) corrected to the luminosity factor according to JIS Z 8722: 2009.
  • the performance of the polarizing plate is required to have a higher transmittance, but if the single transmittance after correction of the luminosity factor is 35% to 60%, the brightness can be expressed without discomfort even when used in a display device.
  • the single transmittance after correction of luminosity factor is more preferably 37% to 50%, and even more preferably 35, from the viewpoint of the balance with the degree of polarization. % To 45%. If the single transmittance after luminosity factor correction exceeds 65%, the degree of polarization may decrease. However, when the bright transmittance of the polarizing element or a specific polarization performance or contrast is required, the luminosity factor is corrected. The single transmittance may exceed 65%.
  • AT 520-590 measured in a parallel position is preferably 25% to 50%.
  • the transmittance of the wavelength band of 520 nm to 590 nm is one of the main wavelength bands based on the color matching function used in the calculation when showing a color in JIS Z 8781-4: 2013.
  • each wavelength band from 520 nm to 590 nm is the wavelength band having the highest luminosity factor based on the color matching function, and the transmittance in this range is close to the transmittance that can be visually confirmed.
  • the degree of polarization of the polarizing element at this time may be 80% to 100%, preferably 90% to 100%, more preferably 97% to 100%, and further preferably 99% or more. Yes, particularly preferably 99.5% or more. It is preferable that the degree of polarization is high, but in the relationship between the degree of polarization and the degree of transmittance, it is necessary to adjust the degree of polarization to an appropriate degree depending on whether the degree of brightness or the degree of polarization (or contrast) is emphasized. Can be done.
  • the chromaticity a * value and b * value are values obtained at the time of measuring the transmittance of natural light according to JIS Z 8781-4: 2013.
  • the object color display method specified in JIS Z 8781-4: 2013 corresponds to the object color display method specified by the International Commission on Illumination (abbreviation: CIE).
  • CIE International Commission on Illumination
  • the measurement of the chromaticity a * value and the b * value is performed by irradiating the measurement sample (for example, a polarizing element or a polarizing plate) with natural light.
  • the chromaticity a * value and b * value required for one measurement sample are a * -s and b * -s, and the two measurement samples are arranged so that their absorption axis directions are parallel to each other.
  • the chromaticity a * value and b * value required for the state (when displayed in white) are a * -p and b * -p, and the two measurement samples are arranged so that their absorption axis directions are orthogonal to each other (black display).
  • the chromaticity a * value and b * value obtained for hour) are shown as a * -c and b * -c.
  • each of the absolute values of a * -s and b * -s is preferably 1.0 or less, and each of the absolute values of a * -p and b * -p is 2.0 or less. It is preferable to have.
  • Such a polarizing element is a neutral color by itself, and can display high-quality white when displaying white.
  • the absolute values of a * -p and b * -p of the polarizing element are more preferably 1.5 or less, still more preferably 1.0 or less.
  • each of the absolute values of a * -c and b * -c is preferably 2.0 or less, and more preferably 1.0 or less.
  • Such a polarizing element can display achromatic black when displaying black. Even if there is a difference of 0.5 between the absolute values of the chromaticity a * value and the b * value, humans can perceive the difference in color, and some people may feel the difference in color greatly. Therefore, it is very important to control these values in the polarizing element. In particular, when the absolute values of a * -p, b * -p, a * -c, and b * -c are 1.0 or less, respectively, when white and black are displayed. A good polarizing plate can be obtained in which other colors can hardly be confirmed in black.
  • the influence of the hue giving the black color of the display device is not limited to this, and in the absence of light (dark), the display device looks black even if it has a hue. Therefore, when the degree of polarization is high, that is, when the orthogonal position transmittance is low, the polarizing element can give black even if the absolute values of a * -c and b * -c are not 2.0 or less, respectively.
  • a * -c and b * when the orthogonal position transmittance at each wavelength of the wavelength band 420 nm to 480 nm, 520 nm to 590 nm, and 600 nm to 640 nm is 1% or less or the degree of polarization is about 97% or more. It was found that it is preferable because black can be visually given regardless of the absolute value of ⁇ c. It is more preferable because black can be visually provided when the orthogonal position transmittance at each wavelength of the wavelength band 420 nm to 480 nm, 520 nm to 590 nm, and 600 nm to 640 nm is 0.6% or less or the degree of polarization is 98% or more. It is particularly preferable when the orthogonal position transmittance of each wavelength is 0.3% or less or the degree of polarization is 99% or more.
  • a preferable method for imparting black hue is any one of the following 1) to 3). Achieve by satisfying. 1) The transmittance of each wavelength obtained by measuring the state in which two polarizing elements are stacked so as to be orthogonal to each other (in black display or in dark display) (hereinafter, "" of each wavelength ".
  • the perpendicular position transmittance also referred to as the perpendicular position transmittance "for.), as the difference between the absolute value of the aT 420-480 and aT 520-590, not more than 1.0%, and the difference between the aT 520-590 and aT 600-640 Is 1.0% or less as an absolute value 2)
  • Each of the absolute values of a * -c and b * -c is 2.0 or less 3)
  • Orthogonal transmittance at wavelength is 1% or less or polarization degree is about 97% or more.
  • the polarizing element according to the present invention has high contrast and high transmittance, while having achromaticity and high degree of polarization by itself.
  • the polarizing element of the present invention can further express high-quality paper-like white (paper white) when displayed in white, and achromatic black when displayed in black, particularly high-quality clear black. Can be expressed.
  • paper white paper-like white
  • achromatic black when displayed in black, particularly high-quality clear black.
  • the polarizing element of the present invention is also highly durable, particularly resistant to high temperatures and high humidity.
  • the polarizing element according to the present invention absorbs less light having a wavelength of 700 nm or more as compared with an iodine-based polarizing plate and Patent Document 3 which are generally used, heat is generated even when irradiated with light such as sunlight. It has the advantage of being less.
  • Sunlight also has light having a wavelength of 700 nm or more, and includes near infrared rays having a heat generating effect.
  • 02-061988 generates a little heat because it absorbs near-infrared light having a wavelength of around 700 nm. Since the polarizing element absorbs very little near infrared rays, it generates less heat even when exposed to sunlight outdoors.
  • the polarizing element of the present invention is excellent in that it generates less heat and therefore causes less deterioration.
  • a specific method for producing a polarizing element will be described by taking as an example a case where an azo compound is adsorbed on a base material made of a polyvinyl alcohol-based resin.
  • the method for manufacturing a polarizing element according to the present invention is not limited to the following manufacturing method.
  • the raw film can be produced by forming a polyvinyl alcohol-based resin.
  • the polyvinyl alcohol-based resin is not particularly limited, and a commercially available resin may be used, or a resin synthesized by a known method may be used.
  • the polyvinyl alcohol-based resin can be obtained, for example, by saponifying a polyvinyl acetate-based resin.
  • Examples of the polyvinyl acetate-based resin include polyvinyl acetate, which is a homopolymer of vinyl acetate, and copolymers of vinyl acetate and other monomers copolymerizable therewith.
  • Examples of other monomers copolymerized with vinyl acetate include unsaturated carboxylic acids, olefins, vinyl ethers, unsaturated sulfonic acids and the like.
  • the degree of saponification of the polyvinyl alcohol-based resin is usually preferably about 85 to 100 mol%, more preferably 95 mol% or more.
  • the polyvinyl alcohol-based resin may be further modified, and for example, polyvinyl formal or polyvinyl acetal modified with aldehydes can also be used.
  • the degree of polymerization of the polyvinyl alcohol-based resin means the viscosity average degree of polymerization, which can be determined by a method well known in the art, and is usually preferably about 1,000 to 10,000, more preferably the degree of polymerization 1. , 500 to 6,000.
  • the method for forming the film of the above-mentioned polyvinyl alcohol-based resin is not particularly limited, and the film can be formed by a known method.
  • the polyvinyl alcohol-based resin film may contain glycerin, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, low molecular weight polyethylene glycol, or the like as a plasticizer.
  • the amount of the plasticizer is preferably 5 to 20% by mass, more preferably 8 to 15% by mass in the total amount of the film.
  • the film thickness of the raw film is not particularly limited, but is, for example, about 5 ⁇ m to 150 ⁇ m, preferably about 10 ⁇ m to 100 ⁇ m.
  • the raw film obtained as described above is subjected to a swelling treatment.
  • the swelling treatment is preferably carried out by immersing the raw film in a swelling solution at 20 to 50 ° C. for 30 seconds to 10 minutes. Water is preferable as the swelling liquid.
  • the draw ratio is preferably adjusted to 1.00 to 1.50 times, more preferably 1.10 to 1.35 times.
  • the dyeing step the resin film obtained by swelling the raw film is adsorbed and impregnated with the azo compound.
  • the swelling treatment of the raw film can be performed at the same time in the dyeing step. Since the process of adsorbing and impregnating the azo compound is a step of coloring the resin film, it is a dyeing step.
  • a mixture of the azo compound represented by the formulas (1) and (2) or a salt thereof is used.
  • an azo compound represented by the formula (6) or the formula (7) or a salt thereof can be further used.
  • the color may be optionally adjusted by using an azo compound which is a dichroic dye exemplified in Non-Patent Document 1 and the like to the extent that the performance of the polarizing element of the present application is not impaired.
  • salts of the compounds may be used.
  • Such salts are alkali metal salts such as, for example, lithium salts, sodium salts, and potassium salts, or organic salts such as ammonium salts and alkylamine salts, preferably sodium salts.
  • the dyeing step is not particularly limited as long as it is a method of adsorbing and impregnating the dye on the resin film, but is preferably performed by immersing the resin film in the dyeing solution, and is performed by applying the dyeing solution to the resin film. You can also do it.
  • Each azo compound in the dyeing solution can be adjusted, for example, in the range of 0.001 to 10% by mass.
  • the solution temperature in this step is preferably 5 to 60 ° C, more preferably 20 to 50 ° C, and particularly preferably 35 to 50 ° C.
  • the time of immersion in the solution can be adjusted appropriately, but it is preferably adjusted to 30 seconds to 20 minutes, more preferably 1 to 10 minutes.
  • the dyeing solution may further contain a dyeing aid, if necessary, in addition to the azo compound.
  • a dyeing aid examples include sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogencarbonate, sodium chloride, sodium sulfate, anhydrous sodium sulfate, sodium tripolyphosphate and the like.
  • the content of the dyeing aid can be adjusted at an arbitrary concentration depending on the time and temperature depending on the dyeability of the dye, and the content of each is preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass, preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass in the dyeing solution. 2% by mass is more preferable.
  • washing step 1 After the dyeing step, a washing step (hereinafter, also referred to as "cleaning step 1") can be performed before entering the next step.
  • the dyeing and cleaning step 1 is a step of cleaning the dyeing solution adhering to the surface of the resin film in the dyeing step. By performing the washing step 1, it is possible to suppress the transfer of the dye into the liquid to be treated next.
  • water is generally used as the cleaning liquid.
  • the cleaning method is preferably immersed in a cleaning liquid, but cleaning can also be performed by applying the cleaning liquid to a resin film.
  • the washing time is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 300 seconds, more preferably 1 to 60 seconds.
  • the temperature of the cleaning liquid in the cleaning step 1 needs to be a temperature at which the material constituting the resin film (for example, a hydrophilic polymer, here, a polyvinyl alcohol-based resin) does not dissolve. Generally, it is washed at 5 to 40 ° C. However, even if the cleaning step 1 is not performed, there is no problem in performance, so that the cleaning step can be omitted.
  • a hydrophilic polymer here, a polyvinyl alcohol-based resin
  • Step of adding a cross-linking agent and / or a water resistant agent After the dyeing step or the washing step 1, a step of adding a cross-linking agent and / or a water resistant agent can be performed.
  • the method of impregnating the resin film with a cross-linking agent and / or a water resistant agent is preferably to immerse the resin film in the treatment solution, but the treatment solution may be applied or coated on the resin film.
  • the treatment solution contains at least one cross-linking agent and / or water resistant agent and a solvent.
  • the temperature of the treatment solution in this step is preferably 5 to 70 ° C, more preferably 5 to 50 ° C.
  • the treatment time in this step is preferably 30 seconds to 6 minutes, more preferably 1 to 5 minutes.
  • cross-linking agent examples include a boron compound such as boric acid, borax or ammonium borate, a polyvalent aldehyde such as glioxal or glutaaldehyde, a polyvalent isocyanate compound such as biuret type, isocyanurate type or block type, and titanium oxy. Titanium-based compounds such as sulfate can be used, but ethylene glycol glycidyl ether, polyamide epichlorohydrin and the like can also be used.
  • water resistant agent examples include succinic peroxide, ammonium persulfate, calcium perchlorate, benzoin ethyl ether, ethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, glycerin diglycidyl ether, ammonium chloride, magnesium chloride and the like, but boric acid is preferable. Used. Water is preferred but not limited as the solvent for the cross-linking agent and / or the water resistant agent. The concentration of the cross-linking agent and / or the water-resistant agent can be appropriately determined by those skilled in the art depending on the type thereof, but in the case of boric acid as an example, the concentration in the treatment solution is 0.1 to 6.0 mass by mass.
  • % Is preferable and 1.0 to 4.0% by mass is more preferable.
  • a stretching step is performed.
  • the stretching step is performed by stretching the resin film uniaxially.
  • the stretching method may be either a wet stretching method or a dry stretching method.
  • the draw ratio is preferably 3 times or more, more preferably 4 to 8 times, and particularly preferably 5 to 7 times.
  • the resin film in water, a water-soluble organic solvent, or a mixed solution thereof. It is preferable to carry out the stretching treatment while immersing in a solution containing at least one cross-linking agent and / or water resistant agent.
  • the cross-linking agent and the water-resistant agent the same ones as described above for the step of containing the cross-linking agent and / or the water-resistant agent can be used.
  • the concentration of the cross-linking agent and / or the water resistant agent in the solution in the stretching step is preferably, for example, 0.5 to 15% by mass, more preferably 2.0 to 8.0% by mass.
  • the stretching temperature is preferably 40 to 60 ° C, more preferably 45 to 58 ° C.
  • the stretching time is usually 30 seconds to 20 minutes, but more preferably 2 to 5 minutes.
  • the wet stretching step can be carried out in one step, but it can also be carried out by multi-step stretching in two or more steps.
  • the stretching heating medium is an air medium
  • the humidity is preferably in an atmosphere of 20 to 95% RH.
  • the heating method include, for example, an inter-roll zone stretching method, a roll heating stretching method, a pressure stretching method, an infrared heating stretching method, and the like, but the stretching method is not limited.
  • the stretching step can be carried out in one step, but can also be carried out by multi-step stretching in two or more steps.
  • the washing step 2 After the stretching step, a cross-linking agent and / or a water resistant agent may precipitate on the surface of the resin film, or foreign matter may adhere to the surface of the resin film. Can be referred to).
  • the washing time is preferably 1 second to 5 minutes.
  • the cleaning method is preferably to immerse the resin film in the cleaning liquid, but the solution can also be applied to the resin film or washed by coating. Water is preferable as the cleaning liquid.
  • the cleaning treatment can be performed in one stage, or the multi-stage treatment in two or more stages can be performed.
  • the solution temperature in the washing step is not particularly limited, but is usually 5 to 50 ° C, preferably 10 to 40 ° C.
  • the treatment liquid or its solvent used in the treatment steps up to this point includes water, for example, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropyl alcohol, glycerin, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, diethylene glycol, and triethylene. Examples thereof include alcohols such as glycol, tetraethylene glycol or trimethylolpropane, and amines such as ethylenediamine and diethylenetriamine, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the treatment liquid or its solvent is most preferably water. Moreover, these treatment liquids or the solvent thereof can be used individually by 1 type, but a mixture of 2 or more types can also be used.
  • a drying step of the resin film is performed.
  • the drying treatment can be carried out by natural drying, but in order to further improve the drying efficiency, it can be carried out by compression with a roll, removal of moisture on the surface with an air knife, a water absorption roll, etc., and / or by blower drying. You can also do it.
  • the drying treatment temperature the drying treatment is preferably performed at 20 to 100 ° C., and more preferably 60 to 100 ° C.
  • the drying treatment time is, for example, 30 seconds to 20 minutes, but is preferably 5 to 10 minutes.
  • the dyeing time and the stretching ratio in the stretching step are preferably adjusted so that the polarizing element satisfies at least one of the following conditions (i) to (v), and of (vi) and (vii). It is more preferable to adjust so as to further satisfy the conditions.
  • Each of the absolute values of the a * value and the b * value is 1.0 or less for the polarizing element alone and 2.0 or less for both the parallel positions.
  • Each of the absolute values of the a * value and the b * value measured at the orthogonal positions is 2 or less.
  • (Vi) AT 520-590 is 25 to 35% for the parallel transmittance of each wavelength.
  • a polarizing element containing at least a combination of azo compounds represented by the formulas (1) and (2), or optionally a combination of azo compounds represented by the formula (6) or the formula (7). can be manufactured.
  • Such a polarizing element has a hue having a neutral color (neutral gray) by itself while having a higher transmittance and a higher degree of polarization than a conventional polarizing element.
  • a high-quality paper-like white color can be expressed.
  • the polarizing element further exhibits a high-quality achromatic black when two polarizing elements are stacked so as to be orthogonal to each other in the absorption axis direction. Further, the polarizing element has high durability against high temperature and high humidity.
  • the polarizing plate according to the present invention includes a polarizing element and a transparent protective layer provided on one side or both sides of the polarizing element.
  • the transparent protective layer is provided for the purpose of improving the water resistance and handleability of the polarizing element.
  • the transparent protective layer is a protective film formed by using a transparent substance.
  • the protective film is a film having a layered shape capable of maintaining the shape of the polarizing element, and is preferably a plastic or the like having excellent transparency, mechanical strength, thermal stability, moisture shielding property, and the like. An equivalent function may be provided by forming a layer equivalent to this.
  • plastics constituting the protective film include thermoplastic resins such as polyester resins, acetate resins, polyether sulfone resins, polycarbonate resins, polyamide resins, polyimide resins, polyolefin resins and acrylic resins.
  • thermosetting resins such as acrylic, urethane, acrylic urethane, epoxy and silicone, or ultraviolet curable resins
  • the polyolefin resin is an amorphous polyolefin resin.
  • a resin having a polymerization unit of a cyclic polyolefin such as a norbornene-based monomer or a polycyclic norbornene-based monomer can be mentioned.
  • TAC triacetyl cellulose
  • the protective film may be subjected to a hard coat treatment, an antireflection treatment, a sticking prevention / diffusion treatment, an antiglare treatment, or the like, as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired.
  • the thickness of the transparent protective layer is usually preferably 10 to 200 ⁇ m.
  • the polarizing plate further includes an adhesive layer for adhering the transparent protective layer to the polarizing element between the transparent protective layer and the polarizing element.
  • the adhesive constituting the adhesive layer is not particularly limited. Examples thereof include polyvinyl alcohol-based adhesives, urethane emulsion-based adhesives, acrylic-based adhesives, polyester-isocyanate-based adhesives, and the like, and polyvinyl alcohol-based adhesives are preferable. Examples of the polyvinyl alcohol-based adhesive include, but are not limited to, Gosenol NH-26 (manufactured by Nippon Synthetic Co., Ltd.) and Exevar RS-2117 (manufactured by Kuraray).
  • a cross-linking agent and / or a water resistant agent can be added to the adhesive.
  • the polyvinyl alcohol-based adhesive it is preferable to use a maleic anhydride-isobutylene copolymer, and if necessary, an adhesive mixed with a cross-linking agent can be used.
  • the maleic anhydride-isobutylene copolymer include Isovan # 18 (manufactured by Kuraray), Isoban # 04 (manufactured by Kuraray), Ammonia-modified Isovan # 104 (manufactured by Kuraray), and Ammonia-modified Isovan # 110 (manufactured by Kuraray).
  • a water-soluble polyvalent epoxy compound can be used as the cross-linking agent at that time.
  • examples of the water-soluble polyvalent epoxy compound include Denacol EX-521 (manufactured by Nagase Chemtech) and Tetrat-C (manufactured by Mitsui Gas Chemicals).
  • known adhesives such as urethane-based, acrylic-based, and epoxy-based adhesives can also be used.
  • polyvinyl alcohol modified with an acetoacetyl group it is preferable to use polyvinyl alcohol modified with an acetoacetyl group, and further, it is preferable to use a polyhydric aldehyde as a cross-linking agent thereof.
  • additives such as zinc compound, chloride and iodide are contained alone or simultaneously at a concentration of about 0.1 to 10% by mass. You can also. Additives to the adhesive are not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected by those skilled in the art.
  • a polarizing plate can be obtained by bonding the transparent protective layer and the polarizing element with an adhesive and then drying or heat-treating at an appropriate temperature.
  • the polarizing element or polarizing plate when the polarizing element or polarizing plate is attached to a display device such as a liquid crystal or an organic electroluminescence (commonly known as OLED or OEL), the viewing angle is improved and / or the surface of the protective layer or film which becomes an unexposed surface later is improved.
  • a display device such as a liquid crystal or an organic electroluminescence (commonly known as OLED or OEL)
  • OLED or OEL organic electroluminescence
  • Various functional layers for improving contrast, layers or films having brightness improving properties can also be provided.
  • the various functional layers are, for example, layers or films that control the phase difference.
  • the polarizing plate is preferably attached to these films and display devices with an adhesive.
  • the polarizing element or the polarizing plate may be provided with various known functional layers such as an AR layer (antireflection layer), an antiglare layer, and a hard coat layer on the transparent protective layer or the exposed surface of the film.
  • a coating method is preferable for producing layers having various functions, but a film having the functions can also be attached via an adhesive or an adhesive.
  • the hard coat layer examples include an acrylic or polysiloxane-based hard coat layer and a urethane-based protective layer.
  • the AR layer can be expected to further improve the single plate light transmittance.
  • the AR layer can be formed by depositing or sputtering a substance such as silicon dioxide or titanium oxide, or by applying a thin coating of a fluorine-based substance.
  • the polarizing element or polarizing plate when the polarizing element or polarizing plate is attached to a display device such as a liquid crystal or an organic electroluminescence (commonly known as OLED or OEL), the viewing angle is improved and / or on the surface of a transparent protective layer or film which is later a non-exposed surface.
  • a display device such as a liquid crystal or an organic electroluminescence (commonly known as OLED or OEL)
  • various functional layers for improving contrast, and a layer or film having brightness improving property may be provided.
  • the various functional layers are, for example, a layer or a film that controls the phase difference (hereinafter, also referred to as a "phase difference plate").
  • phase difference plate By attaching a retardation plate, the polarizing plate of the present invention can also be used as an elliptical polarizing plate.
  • the polarizing plate is preferably attached to these films and display devices with an adhesive.
  • the polarizing plate according to the present invention can realize achromaticity while having high transmittance and high degree of polarization.
  • a high-quality paper-like white color can be expressed when displayed in white, and a neutral black color can be expressed when displayed in black.
  • the polarizing plate according to the present invention has high durability.
  • the polarizing element or polarizing plate of the present invention is provided with a protective layer or a functional layer and a transparent support such as glass, crystal, or sapphire, if necessary, and is provided with a liquid crystal projector, a calculator, a clock, a notebook computer, a word processor, a liquid crystal television, or the like. It is applied to polarized lenses, polarized glasses, car navigation systems, and indoor and outdoor measuring instruments and indicators.
  • the polarizing element or polarizing plate of the present invention is suitably used for a liquid crystal display device, for example, a reflective liquid crystal display device, a semitransmissive liquid crystal display device, and an organic electroluminescence other than the liquid crystal display device.
  • the liquid crystal display device using the polarizing element or the polarizing plate of the present invention can express high-quality paper-like white and neutral black.
  • the liquid crystal display device further becomes a liquid crystal display device having high durability, high reliability, high contrast in the long term, and high color reproducibility.
  • Example 1 A polyvinyl alcohol film (VF-PS # 7500 manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd.) having an average degree of polymerization of 2400 with a saponification degree of 99% or more was immersed in warm water at 45 ° C. for 2 minutes, and a swelling treatment was applied to increase the stretching ratio to 1.30 times. .. 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous sodium sulfate, 0.16 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-5, 0.30 parts by mass of Compound Example 2-12, compound Example 6-1 was immersed in a staining solution containing 0.27 parts by mass at 45 ° C.
  • VF-PS # 7500 manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd. A polyvinyl alcohol film having an average degree of polymerization of 2400 with a saponification degree of 99% or more was immersed in warm water at 45 ° C. for 2 minutes, and a swelling treatment was applied to increase the stretching ratio to 1.30 times.
  • the obtained film was immersed in an aqueous solution at 40 ° C. containing 20 g / l of boric acid (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) for 1 minute.
  • the film after immersion was stretched 5.0 times in an aqueous solution at 50 ° C. containing 30.0 g / l of boric acid for 5 minutes.
  • the obtained film was washed by immersing it in water at 25 ° C. for 20 seconds while maintaining its tension. The washed film was dried at 70 ° C. for 9 minutes to obtain a polarizing element.
  • An alkali-treated triacetyl cellulose film (ZRD-60 manufactured by Fujifilm Co., Ltd.) was prepared by dissolving polyvinyl alcohol (NH-26 manufactured by Japan Vam & Poval Co., Ltd.) in water at 4% of this polarizing element as an adhesive. ) was laminated to obtain a polarizing plate.
  • the obtained polarizing plate maintains the optical performance of the above-mentioned polarizing element, particularly the single transmittance of each wavelength, the parallel position transmittance of each wavelength, the orthogonal position transmittance of each wavelength, the hue, the degree of polarization and the like. It was.
  • This polarizing plate was used as the measurement sample of Example 1.
  • Example 2 The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous glass, 0.16 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-4, and 0. A staining solution containing 30 parts by mass and 0.27 parts by mass of Compound Example 6-1 was treated for 6 minutes at 45 ° C. to prepare a polarizing plate in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained.
  • Example 3 The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous glass, 0.21 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-24, and 0. A dyeing solution at 45 ° C. containing 29 parts by mass and 0.26 parts by mass of Compound Example 6-1 was treated for 6 minutes to prepare a polarizing plate in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained.
  • Example 4 The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous glass, 0.13 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-4, and the compound of Compound Example 2-22. A dyeing solution at 45 ° C. containing 0.35 parts by mass and 0.24 parts by mass of Compound Example 6-1 was treated for 6 minutes and 45 seconds, and the polarizing plate was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained. Made.
  • Example 5 The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous glass, 0.15 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-4, and 0. A dyeing solution at 45 ° C. containing 42 parts by mass and 0.25 parts by mass of Compound Example 6-1 was treated for 6 minutes and 45 seconds to prepare a polarizing plate in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained. ..
  • Example 6 The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous glass, 0.16 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-4, and 0. A dyeing solution at 45 ° C. containing 37 parts by mass and 0.27 parts by mass of Compound Example 6-1 was treated for 6 minutes and 30 seconds to prepare a polarizing plate in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained. ..
  • Example 7 The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous glass, 0.17 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-4, and 0. A dyeing solution at 45 ° C. containing 33 parts by mass and 0.28 parts by mass of Compound Example 7-84 was treated for 6 minutes and 30 seconds to prepare a polarizing plate in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained. ..
  • Example 8 The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous glass, 0.17 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-24, and 0. A dyeing solution at 45 ° C. containing 33 parts by mass and 0.26 parts by mass of Compound Example 7-84 was treated for 6 minutes and 30 seconds to prepare a polarizing plate in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained. ..
  • Example 9 The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous glass, 0.15 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-9, and 0. A dyeing solution at 45 ° C. containing 31 parts by mass and 0.30 parts by mass of Compound Example 7-84 was treated for 6 minutes and 30 seconds to prepare a polarizing plate in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained. ..
  • Example 10 The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous sodium sulfate, and 0.17 parts by mass of the following compound example 1-25 as the compound of the formula (1).
  • Compound Example 2-12 was treated with a staining solution containing 0.32 parts by mass and Compound Example 7-84 by 0.26 parts by mass at 45 ° C. for 6 minutes and 30 seconds, and the same as Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained.
  • a polarizing plate was prepared in the same manner.
  • Example 11 The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous glass, 0.16 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-8, and 0. A dyeing solution at 45 ° C. containing 35 parts by mass and 0.30 parts by mass of Compound Example 6-2 was treated for 6 minutes and 30 seconds to prepare a polarizing plate in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained. ..
  • Comparative Examples 3 to 8 According to the production method of Comparative Example 1 of Patent Document 14, however, the iodine content time was set to 5 minutes and 30 seconds in Comparative Example 3, 4 minutes and 45 seconds in Comparative Example 4, 4 minutes and 15 seconds in Comparative Example 5, and 3 in Comparative Example 6. The time was 30 minutes, 30 seconds, 4 minutes and 00 seconds in Comparative Example 7, and 5 minutes and 15 seconds in Comparative Example 8, and an iodine-based polarizing plate, that is, a polarizing plate containing no azo compound was prepared and used as a measurement sample.
  • Example 12 In Example 1, only the aqueous solution (staining solution) containing the azo compound had the same composition as in Example 1 of Patent Document 3, and the respective staining times were 6 minutes (Comparative Example 10) and 5 minutes (Comparative Example 11). Except for this, in the same manner as in Example 1 of the present application, the time for immersing the swollen film in the aqueous solution was adjusted so that the transmittance was almost the same as that of Example 1, and the azo compound was contained in each of Comparative Example 10. And 11 polarizing plates were prepared.
  • Example 1 instead of Compound Example 1-5, the same amount of the azo compound described in Synthesis Example 1 of Patent Document 15 was contained in the staining solution, and the same as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained. , A polarizing plate was prepared.
  • Example 13 In Example 1, instead of Compound Example 1-5, C.I. I. A polarizing plate was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that Direct Red 4BH was contained in the staining solution in the same amount and an azo compound was contained.
  • Example 5 a polarizing plate was prepared in the same manner as in Example 5 except that the formula (11) was contained in the dyeing solution in the same amount in place of Compound Examples 1-4 and the azo compound was contained.
  • a polarizing plate was produced as in 1.
  • Example 19 In Example 1, an azo compound having a similar color and a ureido skeleton instead of Compound Example 1-5. I. Using 0.98 parts by mass of Direct Red 80, a polarizing plate was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the transmittance of each wavelength at the orthogonal position was adjusted to be substantially constant and the color was black. ..
  • Example 5 In Example 5, instead of Compound Example 2-3, C.I., an azo compound having a dichroic dianisidine skeleton of a similar color. I. Using 0.45 parts by mass of Direct Blue 6, a polarizing plate was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the transmittance of each wavelength at the orthogonal position was designed to be substantially constant and the color was black. did.
  • the parallel transmittance Tp of each wavelength is the spectral transmittance of each wavelength measured by superimposing two measurement samples so that their absorption axis directions are parallel to each other.
  • the orthogonal transmittance Tc of each wavelength is a spectral transmittance measured by superimposing two polarizing plates so that their absorption axes are orthogonal to each other. Measurements were made over wavelengths of 400-700 nm. The average value of each wavelength at 420 to 480 nm for each of the parallel position transmittance Tp and the orthogonal position transmittance Tc obtained from the results obtained by the measurement, and the average value of each wavelength at 520 to 590 nm, and each at 600 to 640 nm. The average value of the wavelength is shown in Table 1.
  • the single transmittance Ys (%) after the luminosity factor correction, the parallel position transmittance Yp (%) after the luminosity factor correction, and the orthogonal position transmittance Yc (%) after the luminosity factor correction were obtained for each measurement sample.
  • the single transmittance Ys (%) after the visual sensitivity correction, the parallel position transmittance Yp (%) after the visual sensitivity correction, and the orthogonal position transmittance Yc (%) after the visual sensitivity correction are in the wavelength region of 400 to 700 nm.
  • Table 2 shows the parallel transmittance Tp of each wavelength of each measurement sample and the orthogonal transmittance Tc of each wavelength of 520 to each.
  • the absolute value of the difference between the average value of each wavelength at 590 nm and the average value of each wavelength at 420 to 480 nm is shown, and the difference between the average value of each wavelength at 520 to 590 nm and the average value of each wavelength at 600 to 640 nm. Indicates the absolute value.
  • the parallel transmittance Tp of each wavelength of the measurement samples of Examples 1 to 11 has an average value of 30% or more at 520 to 590 nm and has a high transmittance. It was. Further, regarding the parallel transmittance Tp of each wavelength, the difference between the average value of each wavelength at 420 to 480 nm and the average value of each wavelength at 520 to 590 nm is 2.5% or less as an absolute value, and 520. The difference between the average value of each wavelength at ⁇ 590 nm and the average value of each wavelength at 600 to 640 nm was 3.0% or less as an absolute value, both of which were very low values.
  • the orthogonal position transmittance Tc of each wavelength is such that the difference between the average value of each wavelength at 420 to 480 nm and the average value of each wavelength at 520 to 590 nm is 1.0% or less as an absolute value and 520.
  • the difference between the average value of each wavelength at about 590 nm and the average value of each wavelength at 600 to 640 nm was 1.0% or less as an absolute value, both of which were very low values. Therefore, it was shown that the measurement samples obtained in Examples 1 to 8 had almost constant average transmittance at each wavelength in each of the parallel position and the orthogonal position.
  • Example 5 when comparing Examples 1 to 11 and Comparative Examples 10 to 14 in which the single transmittance after the luminosity factor correction is 40 to 42%, the contrast of Comparative Examples 10 to 14 is 27 to 189.
  • the contrast of Examples 1 to 11 was 220 or more, and when Example 5 and Comparative Example 14 were particularly compared, Example 5 had a contrast that was about 20% higher.
  • the polarizing plate of the present application has high performance. Looking at the difference between the average value of each wavelength at 520 to 590 nm and the average value of each wavelength at 420 to 480 nm at each Tp, Example 5 is 0.83% higher at 420 to 480 nm, whereas it is a comparative example. Since 14 is only 0.13% higher, it can be seen that the polarizing element of the present application or its polarizing plate can realize a high transmittance at 420 to 480 nm.
  • a * -s and b * -s, a * -p and b * -p, and a * -c and b * -c have a single transmittance Ts, a parallel transmittance Tp, and an orthogonal transmittance, respectively. It corresponds to the chromaticity a * value and b * value at the time of Tc measurement, respectively.
  • the parallel position color is "white” and the orthogonal position color is "black”, but in the embodiment, for example, yellowish white is “yellow” and bluish purple. Black with a tinge is indicated as “blue-purple”.
  • the measurement samples of Examples 1 to 11 had a single transmittance of 35% or more after the visual sensitivity correction. It was found that the measurement samples of Examples 1 to 11 showed a high degree of polarization of 99.5% or more while having a high transmittance, and could sufficiently express white and black. Further, in the measurement samples of Examples 1 to 11, the absolute value of each of a * -s, b * -s, and a * -p is 1.0 or less, and the absolute value of b * -p is 2.0 or less. It showed a very low value. The measurement samples of Examples 1 to 11 expressed a high-quality paper-like white color in a parallel position even when visually observed.
  • the orthogonal position transmittance at each wavelength of the wavelength band 420 nm to 480 nm, 520 nm to 590 nm, and 600 nm to 640 nm is 1% or less or the degree of polarization is about 97% or more, black is expressed.
  • Comparative Examples 1 to 9 and Comparative Examples 15 to 20 at least one of a * -s, b * -s, a * -p, b * -p, a * -c and b * -c is used. When it showed a high value or when the orthogonal position transmittance was 1% or more as in Comparative Example 9, it was not achromatic in the parallel position or the orthogonal position when visually observed.
  • the polarizing element of the present invention can express high-quality paper-like white color in parallel position while maintaining high single-unit transmittance and parallel-position transmittance, and is high-quality without coloring by itself. It was shown to be a hue with a neutral color (achromatic neutral gray). Further, it can be seen that the polarizing element of the present invention maintains a single transmittance after high luminosity factor correction, exhibits achromaticity in a parallel position, and also has a high degree of polarization. Further, it can be seen that the polarizing element of the present invention makes it possible to obtain a polarizing element showing a high-quality achromatic black at an orthogonal position.
  • the polarizing element according to the present invention has high transmittance and high polarization degree, and is achromatic in both white display and black display. By using this, an extremely useful achromatic polarizing plate and display device can be obtained. Can be provided. In one aspect, by using the polarizing element of the present invention, it is possible to provide an achromatic polarizing plate and a display device that exhibit high-quality white color at the time of white display.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polarising Elements (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a polarizer containing an azo compound represented by formula (1) or a salt thereof, and an azo compound represented by formula (2) or a salt thereof. In formula (2): Ag1 is a phenyl group having a substituent or a naphthyl group having a substituent; and Bg and Cg are each independently represented by formula (3) or formula (4), but one of the two is represented by formula (3).

Description

無彩色な偏光素子、並びにこれを用いた無彩色偏光板および表示装置Achromatic polarizing element, and achromatic polarizing plate and display device using this
 本発明は、無彩色の染料系偏光素子、並びにこれを用いた無彩色偏光板および表示装置に関する。 The present invention relates to an achromatic dye-based polarizing element, and an achromatic polarizing plate and a display device using the same.
 偏光素子は一般に、延伸配向したポリビニルアルコール又はその誘導体のフィルムあるいはポリ塩化ビニルフィルムの脱塩酸又はポリビニルアルコール系フィルムの脱水によりポリエンを生成して配向せしめたポリエン系のフィルムなどの基材に、ヨウ素や二色性染料を吸着配向させることにより製造されている。この偏光素子に接着剤層を介してトリアセチルセルロースなどからなる保護フィルムを貼合して得られる偏光板は、液晶表示装置などに用いられる。二色性色素としてヨウ素を用いた偏光板はヨウ素系偏光板と呼ばれ、一方、二色性色素として二色性染料、例えば二色性を有するアゾ化合物を用いた偏光板は染料系偏光板と呼ばれる。これらのうち染料系偏光板は、高耐熱性、高湿熱耐久性、および高安定性を有し、又、色素の配合による色の選択性が高いという特徴がある一方で、同じ偏光度を有するヨウ素系偏光板と比較して透過率およびコントラストが低いという問題があった。このため高い耐久性を維持し、色の選択性が多様であることに加え、より高い透過率で、高い偏光特性を有する偏光素子が望まれている。 The polarizing element is generally formed on a substrate such as a stretch-oriented film of polyvinyl alcohol or a derivative thereof, a polyene-based film obtained by producing and orienting a polyene by dehydroxation of a polyvinyl chloride film or dehydration of a polyvinyl alcohol-based film, and iodine. It is manufactured by adsorbing and orienting a polyene dye. A polarizing plate obtained by laminating a protective film made of triacetyl cellulose or the like on this polarizing element via an adhesive layer is used in a liquid crystal display device or the like. A polarizing plate using iodine as a dichroic dye is called an iodine-based polarizing plate, while a polarizing plate using a dichroic dye as a dichroic dye, for example, an azo compound having dichroism is a dye-based polarizing plate. Is called. Of these, dye-based polarizing plates have high heat resistance, high humidity heat durability, and high stability, and are characterized by high color selectivity due to the blending of dyes, while having the same degree of polarization. There is a problem that the transmittance and contrast are low as compared with the iodine-based polarizing plate. Therefore, a polarizing element having high transmittance and high polarization characteristics in addition to maintaining high durability and various color selectivity is desired.
 さらに、色の選択性が多様である染料系偏光板であっても、これまでの偏光素子は、2枚の偏光素子の吸収軸方向が互いに平行な位置関係(以下、「平行位」とも称する。)になるように重ねて配置して白色を示す際(以下、「白表示時」又は「明表示時」とも称する。)に、黄色味を帯びた白色を呈するという問題があった。この白色が黄色味を帯びるという問題を改善するため、黄色味を抑えて作製された偏光素子であっても、これまでの偏光板は、2枚の偏光素子を吸収軸方向が互いに直交する位置関係(以下、「直交位」とも称する。)になるように重ねて配置して黒色を示す際(以下、「黒表示時」又は「暗表示時」とも称する。)、青色を呈するという問題があった。そのため、白表示時に無彩色の白色を示し、黒表示時に黒色を示す偏光板が求められていた。特に、白表示時に高品位な白を有する偏光板、通称、ペーパーホワイトな偏光板を得ることは難しかった。 Further, even in the case of dye-based polarizing plates having various color selectivity, the conventional polarizing elements have a positional relationship in which the absorption axis directions of the two polarizing elements are parallel to each other (hereinafter, also referred to as "parallel position"). ), There is a problem that a yellowish white color is exhibited when the white color is exhibited (hereinafter, also referred to as “white display” or “bright display”). In order to improve the problem that the white color becomes yellowish, even if the polarizing element is manufactured by suppressing the yellowish color, the conventional polarizing plate has a position where the absorption axis directions of the two polarizing elements are orthogonal to each other. When they are arranged so as to be in a relationship (hereinafter, also referred to as “orthogonal position”) and show black color (hereinafter, also referred to as “black display” or “dark display”), there is a problem of exhibiting blue color. there were. Therefore, there has been a demand for a polarizing plate that exhibits achromatic white when displayed in white and black when displayed in black. In particular, it has been difficult to obtain a polarizing plate having high-quality white when displayed in white, commonly known as a paper-white polarizing plate.
 偏光板が無彩色であるためには、平行位や直交位において各波長の透過率が波長によらずほぼ一定の値であることが必要であるが、そういった偏光板を得ることが、これまでは出来ていなかった。 In order for the polarizing plate to be achromatic, it is necessary for the transmittance of each wavelength to be a substantially constant value regardless of the wavelength in the parallel position or the orthogonal position, but it has been possible to obtain such a polarizing plate. Was not done.
 白表示時と黒表示時の色相が異なる理由としては、平行位と直交位とで透過率の波長依存性が同じではなく、特に、可視光領域にわたって透過率が一定でないことに起因する。さらに、二色性が可視光領域にわたり一定でないことも無彩色偏光板の実現が難しい要因の1つである。 The reason why the hues of white display and black display are different is that the wavelength dependence of the transmittance is not the same in the parallel position and the orthogonal position, and in particular, the transmittance is not constant over the visible light region. Further, the fact that the dichroism is not constant over the visible light region is one of the factors that make it difficult to realize an achromatic polarizing plate.
 ヨウ素系偏光板を例にして説明すると、ポリビニルアルコール(以下、「PVA」とも称する。)を基材とし、二色性色素としてヨウ素を用いたヨウ素系偏光板は、一般的に、480nmおよび600nmを中心とした吸収を有する。480nmの吸収は、ポリヨウ素I とPVAとの錯体、600nmの吸収はポリヨウ素I とPVAとの錯体に起因すると言われている。各波長における偏光度(二色性)は、ポリヨウ素I とPVAとの錯体に基づく偏光度(二色性)の方が、ポリヨウ素I とPVAとの錯体に基づく偏光度(二色性)よりも高い。つまり、直交位の透過率を各波長において一定にしようとすると、平行位の透過率が480nmと比べて600nmの方が高くなり、白表示時に白色が黄色く着色する現象が起こってしまっていた。逆に、平行位の透過率を一定にしようとすると、直交位の透過率が480nmと比べて600nmの方が低くなるため、黒表示時に黒色が青色に着色してしまっていた。白表示時に黄色を呈している場合、一般的に劣化が進んだような印象を与えるため好ましいとは言えない。又、黒表示時に青色を呈する場合、明瞭な黒でないため高級感がないような印象を与える。又、ヨウ素系偏光板では、主に視感度の高い550nm付近には、その波長に基づく錯体がないために、色相の制御が難しい。 Taking an iodine-based polarizing plate as an example, iodine-based polarizing plates using polyvinyl alcohol (hereinafter, also referred to as “PVA”) as a base material and iodine as a dichroic dye generally have 480 nm and 600 nm. Has absorption centered on iodine. Absorption of 480nm is polyiodine I 3 - complex of the PVA, the absorption of 600nm polyiodine I 5 - is said to be due to the complex of the PVA. Polarization at each wavelength (dichroic) is polyiodine I 5 - towards the polarization-based complex of a PVA (dichroic) is polyiodine I 3 - polarization degree based on the complex of the PVA ( Higher than dichroism). That is, when trying to make the transmittance at the orthogonal position constant at each wavelength, the transmittance at the parallel position is higher at 600 nm than at 480 nm, and a phenomenon that white is colored yellow when displayed in white has occurred. On the contrary, when trying to make the transmittance at the parallel position constant, the transmittance at the orthogonal position is lower at 600 nm than at 480 nm, so that black is colored blue when displayed in black. If it is yellow when displayed in white, it generally gives the impression that deterioration has progressed, which is not preferable. In addition, when blue is displayed when displayed in black, it gives the impression that there is no sense of luxury because it is not clear black. Further, in the iodine-based polarizing plate, it is difficult to control the hue mainly in the vicinity of 550 nm, which has high luminosity factor, because there is no complex based on the wavelength.
 このように、各波長の偏光度(二色性)が一定でないために、偏光度の波長依存性が生じてしまっていた。又、ヨウ素とPVAによる錯体は480nmと600nmの2つの吸収しかないため、ヨウ素とPVAからなるヨウ素系偏光板では色相の調整も出来なかった。 In this way, since the degree of polarization (dichroism) of each wavelength is not constant, the wavelength dependence of the degree of polarization has occurred. Further, since the complex of iodine and PVA has only two absorptions of 480 nm and 600 nm, the hue cannot be adjusted by the iodine-based polarizing plate composed of iodine and PVA.
 ヨウ素系偏光板の色相を改善する方法は、特許文献1や特許文献2に記載されている。特許文献1には、ニュートラル係数を算出し、絶対値が0~3である偏光板が記載されている。特許文献2には、410nm~750nmにおける透過率をその平均値の±30%以内にし、ヨウ素に加えて、直接染料、反応染料、又は酸性染料を添加して着色調整してなる偏光膜が記載されている。又、特許文献3のように無彩色の染色系偏光板の技術も開示されている。 A method for improving the hue of an iodine-based polarizing plate is described in Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2. Patent Document 1 describes a polarizing plate having a neutral coefficient calculated and an absolute value of 0 to 3. Patent Document 2 describes a polarizing film in which the transmittance at 410 nm to 750 nm is within ± 30% of the average value, and the color is adjusted by directly adding a dye, a reactive dye, or an acid dye in addition to iodine. Has been done. Further, as in Patent Document 3, a technique of an achromatic dye-based polarizing plate is also disclosed.
特開2002-169024号公報JP-A-2002-169024 特開平10-133016号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 10-13301 WO2014/162635号公報WO2014 / 162635 特開平8-291259号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 8-291259 特開2002-275381号公報JP-A-2002-275381 WO2015/152026号公報WO2015 / 152026 特開平1-161202号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 1-1612202 特開平1-172907号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 1-1272907 特開平1-183602号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 1-183602 特開平1-248105号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 1-248105 特開平1-265205号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 1-265205 特公平7-92531号公報Special Fair 7-92531 特開2009-132794号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-132794 特開2008-065222号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-065222 特開2003-215338号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-215338 特開平11-218611号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 11-218611 特開2001-033627号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-033627 特開2004-251962号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-251962 特開平8-291259号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 8-291259
 しかし、特許文献1の偏光板は、例えばその実施例1から分かるように、ニュートラル係数(Np)が低くても、JIS Z 8729から求められる平行位の色相が、a*値が-1.67、かつ、b*値が3.51であることから、白表示時に黄緑色を呈していることが分かる。又、直交位の色相はa*値が0.69ではあるが、b*値が-3.40であることから、黒表示時に青色を呈している偏光板になってしまっている。又、特許文献2の偏光膜は、偏光膜1枚のみを用いて測定されたUCS色空間におけるa値およびb値を絶対値2以下にして得られるものであり、偏光膜を2枚重ねた際の白表示時および黒表示時の両方の色相において同時に無彩色を表現できるものではなかった。又、特許文献2の偏光膜の単体透過率の平均値は、実施例1で31.95%、実施例2で31.41%であり、低い値を示していた。このように、特許文献2の偏光膜は透過率が低いため、高透過率および高コントラストを求められる分野、特に、液晶表示装置および有機エレクトロルミネッセンスなどの分野では十分な性能を有するものではなかった。さらに、特許文献2の偏光膜は、主たる二色性色素としてヨウ素を用いていることから、耐久性試験後、特に、湿熱耐久性試験(例えば、85℃、相対湿度85%の環境)後に色変化が大きく、耐久性が劣っていた。 However, as can be seen from Example 1 of Patent Document 1, for example, even if the neutral coefficient (Np) is low, the parallel hue obtained from JIS Z 8729 has an a * value of −1.67. Moreover, since the b * value is 3.51, it can be seen that the image is yellowish green when displayed in white. Further, the hue at the orthogonal position has an a * value of 0.69, but a b * value of -3.40, so that the polarizing plate is blue when displayed in black. Further, the polarizing film of Patent Document 2 is obtained by setting the a value and the b value in the UCS color space measured using only one polarizing film to an absolute value of 2 or less, and two polarizing films are laminated. It was not possible to express achromatic colors at the same time in both the hues of white display and black display. The average value of the simple substance transmittance of the polarizing film of Patent Document 2 was 31.95% in Example 1 and 31.41% in Example 2, showing low values. As described above, since the polarizing film of Patent Document 2 has low transmittance, it does not have sufficient performance in fields where high transmittance and high contrast are required, particularly in fields such as liquid crystal display devices and organic electroluminescence. .. Further, since the polarizing film of Patent Document 2 uses iodine as the main dichroic dye, the color is obtained after the durability test, particularly after the wet heat durability test (for example, an environment of 85 ° C. and a relative humidity of 85%). The change was large and the durability was inferior.
 一方、染料系偏光板は、耐久性に優れているが、波長依存性が平行位と直交位で異なることは、ヨウ素系偏光板と同様である。平行位および直交位で同じ色相を示す二色性を示すアゾ化合物はほぼ皆無であり、存在したとしても二色性(偏光特性)は低い。二色性を有するアゾ化合物の種類によっては、白表示時に黄色を呈し、黒表示時に青色を呈するなど、直交位および平行位で波長依存性が全く異なるアゾ化合物も存在する。又、光の明暗によっても人の色の感受性が異なるため、仮に、染料系偏光板の色補正をするとしても、直交位から平行位にわたって偏光をコントロールすることにより発生する光の明暗のそれぞれに適した色補正が必要である。無彩色偏光板は、平行位および直交位のそれぞれにおいて、透過率が各波長でほぼ一定の値であり波長依存性がない状態でなければ達成することができない。さらに、高透過率および高コントラストを有する偏光素子を得るためには、一定の透過率を平行位および直交位で同時に満たすことに加えて、各波長の偏光度(二色比)が高く、かつ、一定である必要がある。アゾ化合物1種を偏光素子に応用した場合でも、直交位と平行位とで各波長の透過率の波長依存性が異なるにも関わらず、2種以上のアゾ化合物を配合して一定の各波長で透過率を達成するためには、1種ずつの平行位と直交位の透過率を考慮し、2種以上の二色比の関係を精密に制御しなければならない。 On the other hand, the dye-based polarizing plate has excellent durability, but the wavelength dependence differs between the parallel position and the orthogonal position, which is the same as the iodine-based polarizing plate. There are almost no azo compounds showing dichroism showing the same hue at the parallel and orthogonal positions, and even if they exist, the dichroism (polarization characteristic) is low. Depending on the type of azo compound having dichroism, there are azo compounds having completely different wavelength dependences at orthogonal and parallel positions, such as yellow when displayed in white and blue when displayed in black. In addition, since the sensitivity of human color differs depending on the brightness of light, even if the color of the dye-based polarizing plate is corrected, the brightness of the light generated by controlling the polarization from the orthogonal position to the parallel position will be different. Appropriate color correction is required. The achromatic polarizing plate cannot be achieved unless the transmittance is a substantially constant value at each wavelength at each of the parallel position and the orthogonal position and there is no wavelength dependence. Further, in order to obtain a polarizing element having high transmittance and high contrast, in addition to simultaneously satisfying a certain transmittance at parallel and orthogonal positions, the degree of polarization (bicolor ratio) of each wavelength is high and , Must be constant. Even when one type of azo compound is applied to a polarizing element, although the wavelength dependence of the transmittance of each wavelength is different between the orthogonal position and the parallel position, two or more types of azo compounds are blended to obtain a constant wavelength. In order to achieve the transmittance in, it is necessary to precisely control the relationship between two or more types of two-color ratios in consideration of the transmittance of each type of parallel position and orthogonal position.
 一方で、たとえ平行位と直交位の各波長の透過率と二色比の関係を精密に制御し、透過率をそれぞれにおいて一定に出来たとしても、高透過率かつ高コントラストを実現することは未だ出来ていなかった。つまり、高透過率又は高偏光度になればなるほど無彩色とすることが困難であり、高透過率又は高偏光度な無彩色な偏光板は達成できていなかった。高透過率かつ/又は高コントラストな無彩色偏光板を得ることは非常に難しく、単に色の三原色の二色性色素を適用すれば達成しうるものではない。特に、平行位において各波長で一定の透過率および高い二色性を同時に実現することは非常に困難を極める。白は僅かに色が入るだけでも、高品位な白を表現できない。又、明状態である時の白は、輝度が高く、感度も高いため、特に重要である。よって、偏光素子として、白表示時に高品位な紙のような無彩色の白色を示し、黒表示時に無彩色の黒色を示すとともに、視感度補正後の単体透過率35%以上および高偏光度を有する偏光素子が求められている。特許文献3においても白表示時および黒表示時に無彩色な偏光板が記載されているが、さらなる性能の向上が望まれている。 On the other hand, even if the relationship between the transmittance and the two-color ratio of each wavelength in the parallel position and the orthogonal position can be precisely controlled and the transmittance can be made constant in each, it is possible to achieve high transmittance and high contrast. It wasn't done yet. That is, it is difficult to make the color achromatic as the transmittance or the degree of polarization becomes higher, and an achromatic polarizing plate having a high transmittance or a high degree of polarization has not been achieved. It is very difficult to obtain an achromatic polarizing plate with high transmittance and / or high contrast, which cannot be achieved by simply applying a dichroic dye of the three primary colors. In particular, it is extremely difficult to simultaneously achieve constant transmittance and high dichroism at each wavelength in the parallel position. White cannot express high-quality white even with a slight amount of color. In addition, white in the bright state is particularly important because it has high brightness and high sensitivity. Therefore, as a polarizing element, it exhibits achromatic white like high-quality paper when displayed in white, and exhibits achromatic black when displayed in black, and has a single transmittance of 35% or more and a high degree of polarization after correction of visual sensitivity. There is a demand for a polarizing element to have. Patent Document 3 also describes an achromatic polarizing plate at the time of white display and black display, but further improvement in performance is desired.
 従って、本発明の目的は、高透過率および高偏光度を有するとともに、白表示時および黒表示時の両方において無彩色である高性能な無彩色偏光素子並びにこれを用いた無彩色偏光板および表示装置を提供することである。他の課題として、白表示時に高品位な白色を呈する偏光素子等を提供することである。 Therefore, an object of the present invention is a high-performance achromatic polarizing element having high transmittance and high polarization degree and being achromatic in both white display and black display, and an achromatic polarizing plate using the same. It is to provide a display device. Another object is to provide a polarizing element or the like that exhibits high-quality white color when displayed in white.
 本発明者は、上記課題を解決すべく鋭意検討した結果、式(1)と式(2)のアゾ化合物の配合によって、二色性に波長依存性がなく、平行位と直交位のそれぞれにおいて無彩色であり、かつ、これまでより高い偏光度を有する偏光素子を作製しうることを見出した。本発明者は、高い透過率であっても可視光領域における波長非依存性を達成しうることを初めて見出し、高品位な紙のような品位の白色、通称、ペーパーホワイトを実現し得るより高い偏光度を有する偏光素子を開発した。 As a result of diligent studies to solve the above problems, the present inventor has no wavelength dependence on the dichroism due to the combination of the azo compounds of the formulas (1) and (2), and in each of the parallel position and the orthogonal position. We have found that it is possible to fabricate a polarizing element that is achromatic and has a higher degree of polarization than before. The present inventor has found for the first time that wavelength independence in the visible light region can be achieved even with high transmittance, and is higher than the ability to realize high-quality paper-like white, commonly known as paper white. We have developed a polarizing element with a degree of polarization.
 すなわち、本発明は以下に関するが、それに限定されない。
[1]
 式(1)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩と式(2)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩を含む偏光素子:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009

 式(1)中、Arは置換基を有するフェニル基又は置換基を有するナフチル基を示し、Rr、Rrは各々独立に、水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、スルホ基、ハロゲン原子、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示し、かつ、Rr、Rrのいずれか少なくとも一方は、上記水素原子以外の基を示し、Rr~Rrは各々独立に、水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示し、jは0又は1を示し、Xrは置換基を有していても良いアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアゾ基、置換基を有していても良いベンゾイル基、又は、置換基を有していても良いベンゾイルアミノ基を示し;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010

 式(2)中、Agは置換基を有するフェニル基又は置換基を有するナフチル基を示し、Bg、Cgは、各々独立に、下記式(3)又は式(4)で表され、いずれか一方が式(3)で表され、Xgは、置換基を有していても良いアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアゾ基、置換基を有していても良いベンゾイル基、又は置換基を有していても良いベンゾイルアミノ基を示し;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011

 式(3)中、Rgは水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示し、pは0~2の整数を示し;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012

 式(4)中、RgおよびRgは各々独立に水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示す。
[2]
 上記式(2)におけるCgが、上記式(3)で表される前項[1]に記載の偏光素子。
[3]
 上記式(2)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩が、下記式(5)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩である前項[1]又は[2]に記載の偏光素子:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013

 式(5)中、Agは置換基を有するフェニル基又は置換基を有するナフチル基を示し、Rg、Rgは各々独立に水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、アルコキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示し、Xgは置換基を有していても良いアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアゾ基、置換基を有していても良いベンゾイル基、又は、置換基を有していても良いベンゾイルアミノ基を示し、p、pは各々独立に0~2の整数を示す。
[4]
 上記式(5)に記載のp及びpが、それぞれ1又は2である前項[3]に記載の偏光素子。
[5]
 上記式(1)のXrが、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアミノ基である前項[1]~前項[4]のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子。
[6]
 上記式(2)に記載のXgが、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアミノ基である前項[1]~前項[5]のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子。
[7]
 下記式(6)または式(7)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩をさらに含む前項[1]~前項[6]のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014

 式(6)中、Ay61はスルホ基、カルボキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、C1~4のアルキル基、又はC1~4のアルコキシ基を示し、Ry61~Ry64は各々独立に水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示し、kは1~3の整数を示し;
 式(7)中、Ay71及びAy72は各々独立に、置換基を有してもよいナフチル基、又は置換基を有してもよいフェニル基であり、s、tは各々独立に0又は1の整数であり、Ry71、Ry72、Ry77、Ry78が、各々独立に、水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基であり、Ry73~Ry76が、各々独立に、水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示す。
[8]
 上記式(7)における、Ay71、Ay72の少なくともいずれか一方が、下記式(8)で表される、式(7)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩を含む前項[7]に記載の偏光素子:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015

 式(8)中、Ry81、Ry82のいずれか一方はスルホ基、カルボキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基であり、他方は水素原子、スルホ基、カルボキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子、ニトロ基、アミノ基、C1~4のアルキル置換アミノ基、又はC1~4のアルキル置換アシルアミノ基であり、式中の*は、上記式(7)の末端アミド基のNH部位との結合位置を示す。
[9]
 上記式(8)における、Ry81、Ry82のいずれか一方がスルホ基又はカルボキシ基であり、他方が水素原子、スルホ基、カルボキシ基、メチル基、又はメトキシ基である前項[8]に記載の偏光素子。
[10]
 上記式(7)における、Ay71、Ay72のいずれか少なくとも一方が置換基を有してもよいナフチル基である、前項[7]~前項[9]のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子。
[11]
 上記式(7)における、Ay71、Ay72が、各々独立に、ヒドロキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基、及びスルホ基からなる群から選択される置換基を有してもよいナフチル基である前項[7]~前項[10]のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子。
[12]
 上記式(7)における、Ay71、Ay72が、それぞれ独立に、下記式(9)で表される、前項[7]~前項[11]のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016

 式(9)中、Ry91は、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基、又はスルホ基であり、fは1~3の整数であり、*は、上記式(7)の末端アミド基のNH部位との結合位置を示す。
[13]
 上記式(9)において、Ry91が水素原子であり、fが2である前項[12]に記載の偏光素子。
[14]
 偏光素子2枚を、各々の吸収軸方向が互いに平行になるように重ねて測定して求められる各波長の透過率において、420nm~480nmの平均透過率と、520nm~590nmの平均透過率との差が絶対値として2.5%以下であり、かつ、520nm~590nmの平均透過率と、600nm~640nmの平均透過率との差が絶対値として3.0%以下である前項[1]~前項[13]のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子。
[15]
 JIS Z 8781-4:2013に従い、自然光を用いて透過率測定時に求められるa*値およびb*値の絶対値が、
上記偏光素子単体で、ともに1.0以下(-1.0≦a*-s≦1.0、-1.0≦b-s*≦1.0)であり、
上記偏光素子2枚を、各々の吸収軸方向が互いに平行になるように重ねて配置した状態で、ともに2.0以下(-2.0≦a*-p≦2.0、-2.0≦b*-p≦2.0)である、
前項[1]~前項[14]のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子
(a*-sは単体でのa*値を示し、b*-sは単体でのb*値を示し、a*-pは平行位でのa*値を示し、b*-pは平行位でのb*を示す)。
[16]
 偏光素子の視感度補正後の単体透過率が35%~45%であり、
偏光素子2枚を、各々の吸収軸方向が互いに平行になるように重ねて配置した状態で求められる520nm~590nmの各波長の平均透過率が28%~45%である、前項[1]~前項[15]のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子。
[17]
 偏光素子2枚を、各々の吸収軸方向が互いに直交するように重ねて配置した状態で求められる各波長の透過率において、
420nm~480nmの平均透過率と520nm~590nmの平均透過率との差が絶対値として1.0%以下であり、並びに、520nm~590nmの平均透過率と600nm~640nmの平均透過率との差が絶対値として1.0%以下である、
前項[1]~前項[16]のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子。
[18]
 波長帯域420nm~480nm、520nm~590nm、および600nm~640nmの各波長における直交位透過率が1%以下、又は偏光度が97%以上である、前項[1]~前項[17]のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子。
[19]
 偏光素子2枚を、各々の吸収軸方向が互いに直交するように重ねて配置した状態で、JIS Z 8781-4:2013に従い、自然光を用いた透過率測定時に求められるa*値およびb*値の絶対値がいずれも2.0以下(-2.0≦a*-c≦2.0、-2.0≦b*-c≦2.0)である、前項[1]~前項[18]のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子(a*-cは直交位でのa*値を示し、b*-cは直交位でのb*を示す)。
[20]
 ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂フィルムを基材として含む、前項[1]~前項[19]のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子。
[21]
 前項[1]~前項[20]のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子と、該偏光素子の片面又は両面に設けられた透明保護層とを備える偏光板。
[22]
 前項[1]~前項[20]のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子又は前項[21]に記載の偏光板を備える表示装置。
That is, the present invention relates to, but is not limited to:
[1]
A polarizing element containing an azo compound represented by the formula (1) or a salt thereof and an azo compound represented by the formula (2) or a salt thereof:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009

In formula (1), Ar 1 represents a phenyl group having a substituent or a naphthyl group having a substituent, and Rr 1 and Rr 2 independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, and an alkoxy of C1 to 4. A group, a sulfo group, a halogen atom, or a C1 to 4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group, and at least one of Rr 1 and Rr 2 shows a group other than the hydrogen atom, and Rr 3 to Rr 6 Independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1-4, an alkoxy group of C1-4, or an alkoxy group of C1-4 having a sulfo group, j represents 0 or 1, and Xr 1 represents a substituent. Amino group which may have, a phenylamino group which may have a substituent, a phenylazo group which may have a substituent, a benzoyl group which may have a substituent, or a substituent. Indicates a benzoylamino group that may have;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010

In the formula (2), Ag 1 represents a phenyl group having a substituent or a naphthyl group having a substituent, and Bg and Cg are independently represented by the following formula (3) or formula (4), whichever is used. One of them is represented by the formula (3), and Xg 1 is an amino group which may have a substituent, a phenylamino group which may have a substituent, and a phenylazo group which may have a substituent. , A benzoyl group which may have a substituent, or a benzoylamino group which may have a substituent;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011

In formula (3), Rg 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group, and p 1 represents an integer of 0 to 2. ;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012

In formula (4), Rg 2 and Rg 3 independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group, respectively.
[2]
The polarizing element according to the preceding item [1], wherein the Cg in the above formula (2) is represented by the above formula (3).
[3]
The polarizing element according to the preceding item [1] or [2], wherein the azo compound represented by the above formula (2) or a salt thereof is an azo compound represented by the following formula (5) or a salt thereof:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013

In the formula (5), Ag 2 represents a phenyl group having a substituent or a naphthyl group having a substituent, and Rg 4 and Rg 5 are independently hydrogen atoms, alkyl groups of C1 to 4, alkoxy groups, or sulfo groups, respectively. Indicates an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a substituent, and Xg 2 is an amino group which may have a substituent, a phenylamino group which may have a substituent, and a phenylazo group which may have a substituent. , A benzoyl group which may have a substituent, or a benzoylamino group which may have a substituent, and p 2 and p 3 each independently indicate an integer of 0 to 2.
[4]
The formula p 2 and p 3 as described in (5), the polarization element according to item [3] are each 1 or 2.
[5]
The polarizing element according to any one of the preceding items [1] to [4], wherein Xr 1 of the above formula (1) is a phenylamino group which may have a substituent.
[6]
The polarizing element according to any one of the above items [1] to [5], wherein Xg 1 described in the above formula (2) is a phenylamino group which may have a substituent.
[7]
The polarizing element according to any one of the preceding items [1] to [6], further containing the azo compound represented by the following formula (6) or the formula (7) or a salt thereof:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014

In the formula (6), Ay 61 represents a sulfo group, a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group of C1 to 4 or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, and Ry 61 to Ry 64 are independent hydrogen atoms and C1 to C4, respectively. Indicates an alkyl group of C1-4, an alkoxy group of C1-4, or an alkoxy group of C1-4 having a sulfo group, and k indicates an integer of 1-3;
In formula (7), Ay 71 and Ay 72 are naphthyl groups which may have a substituent or a phenyl group which may have a substituent, respectively, and s and t are 0 or 0 or t, respectively. It is an integer of 1, and Ry 71 , Ry 72 , Ry 77 , and Ry 78 are independently hydrogen atoms, C1 to 4 alkyl groups, and C1 to 4 alkoxy groups, and Ry 73 to Ry 76 are respectively. Independently, a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, and an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group are shown.
[8]
Described in the previous item [7], wherein at least one of Ay 71 and Ay 72 in the above formula (7) contains an azo compound represented by the formula (7) or a salt thereof, which is represented by the following formula (8). Polarizing element:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015

In formula (8), one of Ry 81 and Ry 82 is a C1 to 4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group, a carboxy group, or a sulfo group, and the other is a hydrogen atom, a sulfo group, a carboxy group, or a sulfo group. With an alkoxy group of C1-4, an alkyl group of C1-4, an alkoxy group of C1-4, a halogen atom, a nitro group, an amino group, an alkyl-substituted amino group of C1-4, or an alkyl-substituted acylamino group of C1-4. Yes, * in the formula indicates the bonding position of the terminal amide group of the above formula (7) with the NH site.
[9]
Described in the previous item [8], wherein one of Ry 81 and Ry 82 in the above formula (8) is a sulfo group or a carboxy group, and the other is a hydrogen atom, a sulfo group, a carboxy group, a methyl group, or a methoxy group. Polarizing element.
[10]
The polarizing element according to any one of the above items [7] to [9], wherein at least one of Ay 71 and Ay 72 in the above formula (7) is a naphthyl group which may have a substituent. ..
[11]
Ay 71 and Ay 72 in the above formula (7) may each independently have a substituent selected from the group consisting of a hydroxy group, a C1 to 4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group, and a sulfo group. The polarizing element according to any one of the above items [7] to [10], which is a naphthyl group.
[12]
The polarizing element according to any one of the preceding items [7] to [11], wherein Ay 71 and Ay 72 in the above equation (7) are independently represented by the following equation (9):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016

In the formula (9), Ry 91 is an alkoxy group or a sulfo group of C1 to 4 having a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group and a sulfo group, f is an integer of 1 to 3, and * is the above formula (7). ) Indicates the binding position of the terminal amide group with the NH site.
[13]
The polarizing element according to the preceding item [12], wherein Ry 91 is a hydrogen atom and f is 2 in the above formula (9).
[14]
The average transmittance of 420 nm to 480 nm and the average transmittance of 520 nm to 590 nm are the transmittances of each wavelength obtained by stacking two polarizing elements so that their absorption axis directions are parallel to each other. The difference is 2.5% or less as an absolute value, and the difference between the average transmittance of 520 nm to 590 nm and the average transmittance of 600 nm to 640 nm is 3.0% or less as an absolute value. The polarizing element according to any one of the preceding items [13].
[15]
According to JIS Z 8781-4: 2013, the absolute values of the a * value and b * value obtained when measuring the transmittance using natural light are
Both of the above polarizing elements are 1.0 or less (-1.0 ≤ a * -s ≤ 1.0, -1.0 ≤ b-s * ≤ 1.0).
In a state where the two polarizing elements are stacked and arranged so that their absorption axis directions are parallel to each other, both are 2.0 or less (-2.0 ≤ a * -p ≤ 2.0, -2.0". ≤b * -p ≤ 2.0),
The polarizing element according to any one of the above items [1] to [14] (a * -s indicates an a * value of a single substance, b * -s indicates a b * value of a single substance, and a * -P indicates the a * value in the parallel position, and b * -p indicates the b * in the parallel position).
[16]
The single transmittance of the polarizing element after correction of the luminosity factor is 35% to 45%.
The average transmittance of each wavelength of 520 nm to 590 nm, which is obtained by arranging two polarizing elements on top of each other so that their absorption axis directions are parallel to each other, is 28% to 45%. The polarizing element according to any one of the preceding items [15].
[17]
In the transmittance of each wavelength obtained in a state where two polarizing elements are stacked and arranged so that their absorption axis directions are orthogonal to each other.
The difference between the average transmittance of 420 nm to 480 nm and the average transmittance of 520 nm to 590 nm is 1.0% or less as an absolute value, and the difference between the average transmittance of 520 nm to 590 nm and the average transmittance of 600 nm to 640 nm. Is 1.0% or less as an absolute value,
The polarizing element according to any one of the preceding items [1] to [16].
[18]
Any one of the preceding paragraphs [1] to [17], wherein the orthogonal position transmittance at each wavelength of the wavelength band 420 nm to 480 nm, 520 nm to 590 nm, and 600 nm to 640 nm is 1% or less, or the degree of polarization is 97% or more. The polarizing element according to the section.
[19]
A * value and b * value obtained at the time of transmittance measurement using natural light according to JIS Z 8781-4: 2013 with two polarizing elements stacked so that their absorption axis directions are orthogonal to each other. The absolute values of are 2.0 or less (-2.0 ≤ a * -c ≤ 2.0, -2.0 ≤ b * -c ≤ 2.0), from the previous item [1] to the previous item [18]. ] (A * -c indicates an a * value at an orthogonal position, and b * -c indicates a b * at an orthogonal position).
[20]
The polarizing element according to any one of the preceding items [1] to [19], which comprises a polyvinyl alcohol-based resin film as a base material.
[21]
A polarizing plate including the polarizing element according to any one of the above items [1] to [20] and a transparent protective layer provided on one side or both sides of the polarizing element.
[22]
A display device including the polarizing element according to any one of the preceding items [1] to [20] or the polarizing plate according to the preceding item [21].
 本発明は、高透過率および高偏光度を有するとともに、白表示時および黒表示時の両方において無彩色である高性能な無彩色偏光素子並びにこれを用いた無彩色偏光板および表示装置を提供することができる。一態様において、本発明の偏光素子等は白表示時に高品位な白色を呈する。 The present invention provides a high-performance achromatic polarizing element having high transmittance and high degree of polarization and being achromatic in both white display and black display, and an achromatic polarizing plate and a display device using the same. can do. In one aspect, the polarizing element or the like of the present invention exhibits a high-quality white color when displayed in white.
 本願明細書及び特許請求の範囲において、明確に遊離形態を表すものである場合を除き、「アゾ化合物又はその塩」を単に「アゾ化合物」と称することもある。 In the specification of the present application and claims, "azo compound or salt thereof" may be simply referred to as "azo compound" unless it clearly represents a free form.
 本願明細書及び特許請求の範囲において、「置換基」には、便宜上、水素原子が含まれる。「置換基を有してもよい」とは、置換基を有していない場合も含まれることを意味する。例えば、「置換基を有してもよいフェニル基」は、非置換の単なるフェニル基と、置換基を有するフェニル基を含む。 In the present specification and claims, the "substituent" includes a hydrogen atom for convenience. The phrase "may have a substituent" means that a case without a substituent is also included. For example, the "phenyl group which may have a substituent" includes a simple phenyl group which is not substituted and a phenyl group which has a substituent.
 上記「C1~4(炭素原子数1~4)のアルキル基」としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、n-ブチル基等の直鎖アルキル基、sec-ブチル基、tert―ブチル基等の分鎖アルキル基、ビニル基等の不飽和炭化水素基等が挙げられる。 Examples of the above-mentioned "alkyl group of C1 to 4 (number of carbon atoms 1 to 4)" include linear alkyl groups such as methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group and n-butyl group, sec-butyl group and tert. -A branched alkyl group such as a butyl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group such as a vinyl group, and the like can be mentioned.
 上記「C1~4のアルコキシ基」としては、例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、n-ブトキシ基、sec-ブトキシ基、tert-ブトキシ基等が挙げられる。 Examples of the above-mentioned "alkoxy group of C1 to 4" include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, an n-butoxy group, a sec-butoxy group, a tert-butoxy group and the like.
<偏光素子>
 本発明に係る偏光素子は、上記式(1)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩と、上記式(2)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩を含む。本発明に係る偏光素子は、さらに任意で、前記アゾ化合物以外の構造を有する有機染料1種以上を含むことができる。例えば、上記式(6)または式(7)で表されるアゾ化合物をさらに含んでいても良く、式(1)と式(2)と式(6)、または式(1)と式(2)と式(7)を含むことが好ましい。
<Polarizing element>
The polarizing element according to the present invention includes an azo compound represented by the above formula (1) or a salt thereof, and an azo compound represented by the above formula (2) or a salt thereof. The polarizing element according to the present invention may further optionally contain one or more organic dyes having a structure other than the azo compound. For example, the azo compound represented by the above formula (6) or the formula (7) may be further contained, and the formula (1) and the formula (2) and the formula (6), or the formula (1) and the formula (2). ) And formula (7) are preferably included.
 上記偏光素子は、二色性色素、特にアゾ化合物を吸着し得る親水性高分子を製膜して得られるフィルム等を基材として用いることが好ましい。親水性高分子は、特に限定されないが、例えば、ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂、アミロース系樹脂、デンプン系樹脂、セルロース系樹脂、およびポリアクリル酸塩系樹脂などである。親水性高分子は、二色性色素の染色性、加工性および架橋性などの観点からポリビニルアルコール系樹脂およびその誘導体であることが最も好ましい。基材に、アゾ化合物又はその塩を吸着させ、延伸等の配向処理を適用することによって、偏光素子を作製することができる。 The above-mentioned polarizing element preferably uses a dichroic dye, particularly a film obtained by forming a hydrophilic polymer capable of adsorbing an azo compound, as a base material. The hydrophilic polymer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include polyvinyl alcohol-based resins, amylose-based resins, starch-based resins, cellulosic resins, and polyacrylate-based resins. The hydrophilic polymer is most preferably a polyvinyl alcohol-based resin or a derivative thereof from the viewpoint of dyeability, processability, crosslinkability and the like of the dichroic dye. A polarizing element can be produced by adsorbing an azo compound or a salt thereof on a base material and applying an orientation treatment such as stretching.
 上記式(1)で表されるアゾ化合物について説明する。 The azo compound represented by the above formula (1) will be described.
 式(1)中、Arは置換基を有するフェニル基又は置換基を有するナフチル基を示し、Rr、Rrは各々独立に、水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、スルホ基、ハロゲン原子、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示し、かつ、Rr、Rrのいずれか少なくとも一方は、上記水素原子以外の基を示す。Rr~Rrは各々独立に、水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示し、jは0又は1を示し、Xrは置換基を有していても良いアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアゾ基、置換基を有していても良いベンゾイル基、又は、置換基を有していても良いベンゾイルアミノ基を示す。 In the formula (1), Ar 1 represents a phenyl group having a substituent or a naphthyl group having a substituent, and Rr 1 and Rr 2 are independently hydrogen atoms, alkyl groups C1 to 4 and alkoxys C1 to 4. It represents a group, a sulfo group, a halogen atom, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group, and at least one of Rr 1 and Rr 2 represents a group other than the hydrogen atom. Rr 3 to Rr 6 independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group, where j indicates 0 or 1, and Xr. Reference numeral 1 is an amino group which may have a substituent, a phenylamino group which may have a substituent, a phenylazo group which may have a substituent, and a benzoyl group which may have a substituent. , Or a benzoylamino group which may have a substituent.
 上記式(1)のArにおける置換基を有するフェニル基又は置換基を有するナフチル基について説明する。Arが置換基を有するフェニル基である場合、その置換基としてスルホ基又はカルボキシ基を少なくとも1つ有することが好ましい。該フェニル基が置換基を2つ以上有する場合は、それら置換基の少なくとも1つがスルホ基又はカルボキシ基であり、他方の置換基としては、スルホ基、カルボキシ基、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基、ニトロ基、ベンゾイル基、アミノ基、アセチルアミノ基、又はC1~4のアルキルアミノ基置換アミノ基が好ましく、他方の置換基は、より好ましくは、スルホ基、メチル基、エチル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、カルボキシ基、ニトロ基、ベンゾイル基、又はアミノ基であり、特に好ましくはスルホ基、メチル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、ベンゾイル基、又はカルボキシ基である。上記スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基としては、直鎖アルコキシ基が好ましく、スルホ基の置換位置はアルコキシ基末端が好ましく、より好ましくは3-スルホプロポキシ基および4-スルホブトキシ基であるが、特に好ましくは3-スルホプロポキシ基である。該フェニル基が有するスルホ基の数は1又は2が好ましく、置換位置については特に限定はしないが、アミド基の置換位置を1位とした場合、4位のみ、2位と4位の組合せ、および3位と5位の組合せが好ましい。 The phenyl group having a substituent in Ar 1 of the above formula (1) or the naphthyl group having a substituent will be described. When Ar 1 is a phenyl group having a substituent, it is preferable to have at least one sulfo group or carboxy group as the substituent. When the phenyl group has two or more substituents, at least one of the substituents is a sulfo group or a carboxy group, and the other substituents are a sulfo group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group of C1 to 4 and C1. A alkoxy group of to 4 and a C1 to 4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group, a nitro group, a benzoyl group, an amino group, an acetylamino group, or an alkylamino group-substituted amino group of C1 to 4 is preferable, and the other substituent is More preferably, it is a sulfo group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a carboxy group, a nitro group, a benzoyl group or an amino group, and particularly preferably a sulfo group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group and a benzoyl group. It is a group or a carboxy group. As the alkoxy group of C1 to C4 having a sulfo group, a linear alkoxy group is preferable, and the substituent of the sulfo group is preferably an alkoxy group terminal, more preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group and a 4-sulfobutoxy group. , Particularly preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group. The number of sulfo groups contained in the phenyl group is preferably 1 or 2, and the substitution position is not particularly limited. However, when the substitution position of the amide group is the 1-position, only the 4-position is a combination of the 2-position and the 4-position. And a combination of 3rd and 5th positions is preferable.
 上記Arが置換基を有するナフチル基である場合、置換基としてスルホ基、ヒドロキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を少なくとも1つ有することが好ましく、置換基を2つ以上有する場合は、それら置換基の少なくとも1つがスルホ基であり、他方の置換基としては、スルホ基、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基が好ましい。スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基としては、直鎖アルコキシ基が好ましく、スルホ基の置換位置はアルコキシ基末端が好ましく、より好ましくは3-スルホプロポキシ基および4-スルホブトキシ基であるが、特に好ましくは3-スルホプロポキシ基である。スルホ基の数が2の場合、ナフチル基上のスルホ基の位置は、アミド基の置換位置が2位とした場合、4位と8位の組合せ、および6位と8位の組合せが好ましく、6位と8位の組合せがより好ましい。ナフチル基が有するスルホ基の数が3の場合、スルホ基の置換位置として3位と6位と8位の組合せが特に好ましい。 When Ar 1 is a naphthyl group having a substituent, it is preferable to have at least one alkoxy group of C1 to C4 having a sulfo group, a hydroxy group and a sulfo group as the substituent, and when it has two or more substituents. Is a sulfo group at least one of these substituents, and as the other substituent, a sulfo group, a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, or a C1 to 4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group is preferable. As the alkoxy group of C1 to C4 having a sulfo group, a linear alkoxy group is preferable, and the substituent of the sulfo group is preferably an alkoxy group terminal, more preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group and a 4-sulfobutoxy group. Particularly preferred is a 3-sulfopropoxy group. When the number of sulfo groups is 2, the position of the sulfo group on the naphthyl group is preferably a combination of the 4-position and the 8-position and a combination of the 6-position and the 8-position when the substitution position of the amide group is the 2-position. A combination of 6th and 8th positions is more preferable. When the number of sulfo groups contained in the naphthyl group is 3, a combination of the 3-position, the 6-position and the 8-position is particularly preferable as the substitution position of the sulfo group.
 上記Rr、Rrは各々独立に、水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、スルホ基、ハロゲン原子、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示し、かつ、Rr、Rrのいずれか少なくとも一方は、上記水素原子以外の基を示す。Rr、Rrが各々独立に、水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、スルホ基、塩素原子からなる群から選択されることが好ましく、水素原子、メチル基、メトキシ基からなる群から選択されることがさらに好ましい。上記スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基としては、直鎖アルコキシ基が好ましく、スルホ基の置換位置は、アルコキシ基末端が好ましく、より好ましくは3-スルホプロポキシ基および4-スルホブトキシ基であるが、特に好ましくは3-スルホプロポキシ基である。Rr、Rrが水素原子以外の上記基である場合、その置換位置は、アミド基の置換位置が1位とした場合、2位のみ、3のみ、2位と5位、2位と6位、3位と5位の組合せが挙げられるが、2位のみ、3位のみが好ましく、2位に置換されることが特に好ましい。 Rr 1 and Rr 2 independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, a sulfo group, a halogen atom, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group, respectively. At least one of Rr 1 and Rr 2 represents a group other than the hydrogen atom. It is preferable that Rr 1 and Rr 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, a sulfo group, and a chlorine atom, and a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, and methoxy. It is more preferred to be selected from the group consisting of groups. As the alkoxy group of C1 to C4 having a sulfo group, a linear alkoxy group is preferable, and the substituent of the sulfo group is preferably an alkoxy group terminal, more preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group and a 4-sulfobutoxy group. However, it is particularly preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group. When Rr 1 and Rr 2 are the above groups other than the hydrogen atom, the substitution positions are only the 2nd position, 3 only, the 2nd position and the 5th position, and the 2nd position and 6 when the substitution position of the amide group is the 1st position. Although combinations of the 3-position and the 5-position can be mentioned, only the 2-position is preferable, and only the 3-position is preferable, and it is particularly preferable that the position is replaced with the 2-position.
 上記Rr~Rrは各々独立に、水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示す。Rr~Rrは各々独立に、好ましくは水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、又はC1~4のアルコキシ基であり、より好ましくは水素原子、メチル基、又はメトキシ基である。スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基としては、直鎖アルコキシ基が好ましく、スルホ基の置換位置はアルコキシ基末端が好ましく、より好ましくは3-スルホプロポキシ基および4-スルホブトキシ基であるが、特に好ましくは3-スルホプロポキシ基である。置換位置は、アミド基側のアゾ基の置換位置を1位とした場合、2位のみ、3のみ、2位と5位、2位と6位、3位と5位、3位と6位の組合せが挙げられるが、2位のみ、3位のみ、2位と5位、3位と6位のそれぞれの組合せが好ましい。 The above Rr 3 to Rr 6 independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group. Rr 3 to Rr 6 are each independently, preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, and more preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or a methoxy group. As the alkoxy group of C1 to C4 having a sulfo group, a linear alkoxy group is preferable, and the substituent of the sulfo group is preferably an alkoxy group terminal, more preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group and a 4-sulfobutoxy group. Particularly preferred is a 3-sulfopropoxy group. As for the substitution position, when the substitution position of the azo group on the amide group side is the 1-position, only the 2-position, the 3-only, the 2-position and the 5-position, the 2-position and the 6-position, the 3-position and the 5-position, and the 3-position and the 6-position However, combinations of 2nd place only, 3rd place only, 2nd place and 5th place, and 3rd place and 6th place are preferable.
 上記jは0又は1を示す。jが0の場合、色の制御が容易になり、JIS Z 8781-4:2013により、自然光を用いた場合の透過率測定時に求められるa*値およびb*値の絶対値が、偏光素子2枚を、各々の吸収軸方向が互いに平行になるように重ねて配置した状態で、ともに2.0以下に調整しやすいため、色の調整のための好ましい一つの形態である。jが1の場合、高い偏光度を示すため、高性能化のためには好ましい形態の一つである。 The above j indicates 0 or 1. When j is 0, color control becomes easy, and according to JIS Z8781-4: 2013, the absolute values of the a * value and b * value obtained when measuring the transmittance when using natural light are the polarizing element 2. This is a preferable form for color adjustment because it is easy to adjust both of the sheets to 2.0 or less in a state where the sheets are stacked so that their absorption axis directions are parallel to each other. When j is 1, it shows a high degree of polarization, which is one of the preferable forms for improving the performance.
 上記Xrは、置換基を有していても良いアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアゾ基、置換基を有していても良いベンゾイル基、又は置換基を有していても良いベンゾイルアミノ基を示す。置換基を有していても良いアミノ基は、好ましくは水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、スルホ基、アミノ基、およびC1~4のアルキルアミノ基からなる群から選択される1つ又は2つの置換基を有するアミノ基であり、より好ましくは、水素原子、メチル基、エチル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、アミノ基、およびC1~4のアルキルアミノ基からなる群から選択される1つ又は2つの置換基を有するアミノ基である。置換基を有していても良いフェニルアミノ基は、好ましくは、水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、スルホ基、アミノ基、およびC1~4のアルキルアミノ基からなる群から選択される1つ又は2つの置換基を有するフェニルアミノ基であり、より好ましくは、水素原子、メチル基、メトキシ基、スルホ基、およびアミノ基からなる群から選択される1つ又は2つの置換基を有するフェニルアミノ基である。置換基を有していても良いベンゾイル基は、好ましくは、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、スルホ基、アミノ基、およびカルボキシエチルアミノ基からなる群から選択される1つを有するベンゾイル基である。置換基を有してもよいベンゾイルアミノ基は、好ましくは、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、アミノ基、およびカルボキシエチルアミノ基からなる群から選択される1つを有するベンゾイルアミノ基である。置換基を有していても良いフェニルアゾ基は、好ましくは、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、アミノ基およびカルボキシエチルアミノ基からなる群から選択される1~3つを有するフェニルアゾ基である。Xrは、好ましくは、置換基を有していても良いアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いベンゾイルアミノ基、および置換基を有していても良いフェニルアミノ基であり、より好ましくは、置換基を有していても良いアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアミノ基である。置換基の位置は特に限定されないが、Xrがフェニル基を有する基の場合、置換基の1つが、式(1)に示されるナフタレン骨格と間接的に結合する結合位置に対してp位に置換していることが特に好ましく、具体的な例として、フェニルアミノ基の場合、アミノ基に対してp位に置換基があることが好ましい。 The Xr 1 may have an amino group which may have a substituent, a phenylamino group which may have a substituent, a phenylazo group which may have a substituent, and a substituent. Indicates a good benzoyl group, or a benzoylamino group which may have a substituent. The amino group which may have a substituent preferably comprises a group consisting of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1-4, an alkoxy group of C1-4, a sulfo group, an amino group, and an alkylamino group of C1-4. An amino group having one or two substituents of choice, more preferably a group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, an amino group, and an alkylamino group of C1-4. An amino group having one or two substituents selected from. The phenylamino group which may have a substituent preferably comprises a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1-4, an alkoxy group of C1-4, a sulfo group, an amino group, and an alkylamino group of C1-4. A phenylamino group having one or two substituents selected from the group, more preferably one or two selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a methoxy group, a sulfo group, and an amino group. It is a phenylamino group having one substituent. The benzoyl group which may have a substituent is preferably a benzoyl group having one selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, a sulfo group, an amino group, and a carboxyethylamino group. The benzoylamino group which may have a substituent is preferably a benzoylamino group having one selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an amino group, and a carboxyethylamino group. The phenylazo group which may have a substituent is preferably selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, an amino group and a carboxyethylamino group. It is a phenylazo group having 1 to 3 groups. Xr 1 is preferably an amino group which may have a substituent, a benzoylamino group which may have a substituent, and a phenylamino group which may have a substituent, and more preferably. Is an amino group which may have a substituent and a phenylamino group which may have a substituent. The position of the substituent is not particularly limited, but when Xr 1 is a group having a phenyl group, one of the substituents is at the p-position with respect to the bond position indirectly bonded to the naphthalene skeleton represented by the formula (1). Substitution is particularly preferable, and as a specific example, in the case of a phenylamino group, it is preferable that the substituent is at the p-position with respect to the amino group.
 上記式(1)で表されるアゾ化合物を得る方法としては、特許文献4~6等に記載されている方法が挙げられるが、これらに限定されるものではない。 Examples of the method for obtaining the azo compound represented by the above formula (1) include, but are not limited to, the methods described in Patent Documents 4 to 6 and the like.
 上記式(1)で表されるアゾ化合物のさらなる具体例を、遊離酸の形式で以下に示す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Further specific examples of the azo compound represented by the above formula (1) are shown below in the form of a free acid.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 次に、上記式(2)で表される化合物について説明をする。 Next, the compound represented by the above formula (2) will be described.
 上記式(2)において、Agは、置換基を有するフェニル基又は置換基を有するナフチル基を示す。Agが置換基を有するフェニル基である場合、置換基としてスルホ基又はカルボキシ基を少なくとも1つ有することが好ましい。該フェニル基が置換基を2つ以上有する場合は、それら置換基の少なくとも1つがスルホ基又はカルボキシ基であり、他方の置換基が、スルホ基、カルボキシ基、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、アセチルアミノ基、又はC1~4のアルキルアミノ基置換アミノ基であることが好ましい。他方の置換基は、より好ましくは、スルホ基、メチル基、エチル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、カルボキシ基、ニトロ基、又はアミノ基であり、特に好ましくはスルホ基、メチル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、又はカルボキシ基である。スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基としては、直鎖アルコキシ基が好ましく、スルホ基の置換位置はアルコキシ基末端が好ましく、より好ましくは3-スルホプロポキシ基および4-スルホブトキシ基であり、特に好ましくは3-スルホプロポキシ基である。該フェニル基が有する置換基の数は1又は2が好ましく、置換位置は特に限定されないが、アゾ基の位置を1位とした場合、4位のみ、2位と4位の組合せ、および3位と5位の組合せが好ましい。Agが置換基を有するナフチル基である場合、その置換基としてスルホ基を少なくとも1つ有することが好ましい。該ナフチル基が置換基を2つ以上有する場合は、それら置換基の少なくとも1つがスルホ基、ヒドロキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基であり、その他の置換基としては、スルホ基、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基が好ましい。該ナフチル基は、置換基として2つ以上のスルホ基を有することが特に好ましい。スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基としては、直鎖アルコキシ基が好ましく、スルホ基の置換位置はアルコキシ基末端が好ましく、より好ましくは3-スルホプロポキシ基および4-スルホブトキシ基であるが、特に好ましくは3-スルホプロポキシ基である。該ナフチル基が有するスルホ基の数が2である場合、スルホ基の置換位置はアゾ基の位置を2位とした場合、4位と8位の組合せ、および6位と8位の組合せが好ましく、6位と8位の組合せがより好ましい。ナフチル基が有するスルホ基の数が3である場合、スルホ基の置換位置は好ましくはアゾ基の置換位置を2位とした場合、3位と6位と8位の組合せである。 In the above formula (2), Ag 1 represents a phenyl group having a substituent or a naphthyl group having a substituent. When Ag 1 is a phenyl group having a substituent, it is preferable to have at least one sulfo group or carboxy group as the substituent. When the phenyl group has two or more substituents, at least one of the substituents is a sulfo group or a carboxy group, and the other substituent is a sulfo group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, C1 to It is preferably an alkoxy group of 4, a C1 to 4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group, a nitro group, an amino group, an acetylamino group, or a C1 to 4 alkylamino group substituted amino group. The other substituent is more preferably a sulfo group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a carboxy group, a nitro group, or an amino group, and particularly preferably a sulfo group, a methyl group, a methoxy group or an ethoxy group. It is a group or a carboxy group. As the alkoxy group of C1 to C4 having a sulfo group, a linear alkoxy group is preferable, and the substituent of the sulfo group is preferably an alkoxy group terminal, more preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group and a 4-sulfobutoxy group, and particularly. It is preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group. The number of substituents of the phenyl group is preferably 1 or 2, and the substitution position is not particularly limited. However, when the position of the azo group is the 1-position, only the 4-position is the combination of the 2-position and the 4-position, and the 3-position. A combination of 5 and 5 is preferable. When Ag 1 is a naphthyl group having a substituent, it is preferable to have at least one sulfo group as the substituent. When the naphthyl group has two or more substituents, at least one of the substituents is a sulfo group, a hydroxy group, a C1 to 4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group, and the other substituents include a sulfo group. C1-4 alkoxy groups having a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, or a sulfo group are preferable. It is particularly preferable that the naphthyl group has two or more sulfo groups as a substituent. As the alkoxy group of C1 to C4 having a sulfo group, a linear alkoxy group is preferable, and the substituent of the sulfo group is preferably an alkoxy group terminal, more preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group and a 4-sulfobutoxy group. Particularly preferred is a 3-sulfopropoxy group. When the number of sulfo groups contained in the naphthyl group is 2, the substitution position of the sulfo group is preferably a combination of the 4-position and the 8-position and a combination of the 6-position and the 8-position when the position of the azo group is the 2-position. , A combination of 6th and 8th positions is more preferable. When the number of sulfo groups contained in the naphthyl group is 3, the substitution position of the sulfo group is preferably a combination of the 3-position, the 6-position and the 8-position when the substitution position of the azo group is the 2-position.
 上記式(2)におけるBgおよびCgは、各々独立に、上記式(3)又は上記式(4)で表されるが、BgおよびCgのいずれか一方は上記式(3)で表される。 Bg and Cg in the above formula (2) are independently represented by the above formula (3) or the above formula (4), but either Bg or Cg is represented by the above formula (3).
 上記式(3)において、Rgは水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示し、好ましくは、水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、又はC1~4のアルコキシ基であり、より好ましくは水素原子、メチル基、又はメトキシ基である。特に好ましいRgは、水素原子又はメトキシ基であることが良い。スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基としては、直鎖アルコキシ基が好ましく、スルホ基の置換位置はアルコキシ基末端が好ましく、より好ましくは3-スルホプロポキシ基および4-スルホブトキシ基であり、特に好ましくは3-スルホプロポキシ基である。式(3)において、Rgの置換位置は、Ag側に置換されているアゾ基を1位として、2位又は3位が好ましく、より好ましくは3位である。pは0~2の整数を示す。スルホ基がある場合(pが1又は2)には、そのスルホ基の置換位置は6位又は7位が好ましく、より好ましくは6位である。 In the above formula (3), Rg 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group, and preferably a hydrogen atom, C1 to 4 Alkyl group or C1-4 alkoxy group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or a methoxy group. A particularly preferable Rg 1 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methoxy group. As the alkoxy group of C1 to C4 having a sulfo group, a linear alkoxy group is preferable, and the substituent of the sulfo group is preferably an alkoxy group terminal, more preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group and a 4-sulfobutoxy group, and particularly. It is preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group. In the formula (3), the substitution position of Rg 1 is preferably the 2-position or the 3-position, and more preferably the 3-position, with the azo group substituted on the Ag 1 side as the 1-position. p 1 represents an integer of 0 to 2. When there is a sulfo group (p 1 is 1 or 2), the substitution position of the sulfo group is preferably 6-position or 7-position, and more preferably 6-position.
 上記式(4)において、RgおよびRgは各々独立に水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示し、好ましくは水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基であり、より好ましくは水素原子、メチル基、メトキシ基、3-スルホプロポキシ基、又は、4-スルホプロポキシ基である。Rg、又は、Rgの置換位置としては、上記式(2)におけるAg側に置換されているアゾ基を1位として2位のみ、5位のみ、2位および5位、3位および5位、2位および6位、又は、3位および6位の組合せが適用できるが、2位のみ、5位のみ、2位および5位が好ましい。なお、2位のみ、5位のみは、2位又は5位のみに水素原子以外の置換基を1つ有することを示す。 In the above formula (4), Rg 2 and Rg 3 independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group, and hydrogen is preferable. An atom, an alkyl group of C1-4, an alkoxy group of C1-4, or an alkoxy group of C1-4 having a sulfo group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a methoxy group, a 3-sulfopropoxy group, or It is a 4-sulfopropoxy group. As the substitution positions of Rg 2 or Rg 3, the azo group substituted on the Ag 1 side in the above formula (2) is used as the 1-position, and only the 2-position, the 5-position, the 2-position, the 5-position, and the 3-position are used. The 5th, 2nd and 6th positions, or the combination of the 3rd and 6th positions can be applied, but only the 2nd position, the 5th position, the 2nd and 5th positions are preferable. Note that only the 2-position and the 5-position indicate that only the 2-position or the 5-position has one substituent other than a hydrogen atom.
 上記式(2)におけるXgは、置換基を有していても良いアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアゾ基、置換基を有していても良いベンゾイル基又は置換基を有していても良いベンゾイルアミノ基を示す。Xgは、好ましくは、置換基を有していても良いアミノ基又は置換基を有していても良いフェニルアミノ基であり、より好ましくは置換基を有していても良いフェニルアミノ基である。置換基を有していても良いアミノ基は、好ましくは、水素原子、メチル基、メトキシ基、スルホ基、アミノ基、およびC1~4のアルキルアミノ基からなる群から選択される1つ又は2つを有するアミノ基であり、さらに好ましくは水素原子、メチル基、スルホ基を1つ又は2つ有するアミノ基である。置換基を有していても良いフェニルアミノ基は、好ましくは、水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、スルホ基、アミノ基、およびC1~4のアルキルアミノ基からなる群から選択される1つ又は2つの置換基を有するフェニルアミノ基であり、より好ましくは、水素原子、メチル基、メトキシ基、スルホ基、およびアミノ基からなる群から選択される1つ又は2つの置換基を有するフェニルアミノ基である。フェニルアゾ基は、好ましくは、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、アミノ基、ヒドロキシ基およびカルボキシエチルアミノ基からなる群から選択される1~3つを有するフェニルアゾ基である。置換基を有してもよいベンゾイル基は、好ましくは、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、アミノ基、およびカルボキシエチルアミノ基からなる群から選択される1つの置換基を有するベンゾイル基である。置換基を有していても良いベンゾイルアミノ基は、好ましくは、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、アミノ基、およびカルボキシエチルアミノ基からなる群から選択される1つの置換基を有するベンゾイルアミノ基である。置換基の位置は特に限定されないが、Xgがフェニル基を有する基の場合、置換基の1つが、式(2)に示されるナフタレン骨格と間接的に結合する結合位置に対してp位にあることが特に好ましく、具体的な例として、フェニルアミノ基の場合、アミノ基に対してp位に置換基があることが好ましい。 Xg 1 in the above formula (2) includes an amino group which may have a substituent, a phenylamino group which may have a substituent, a phenylazo group which may have a substituent, and a substituent. Indicates a benzoyl group which may have a benzoyl group or a benzoylamino group which may have a substituent. Xg 1 is preferably an amino group which may have a substituent or a phenylamino group which may have a substituent, and more preferably a phenylamino group which may have a substituent. is there. The amino group which may have a substituent is preferably one or 2 selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a methoxy group, a sulfo group, an amino group, and an alkylamino group of C1-4. It is an amino group having one, more preferably an amino group having one or two hydrogen atoms, a methyl group and a sulfo group. The phenylamino group which may have a substituent preferably comprises a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1-4, an alkoxy group of C1-4, a sulfo group, an amino group, and an alkylamino group of C1-4. A phenylamino group having one or two substituents selected from the group, more preferably one or two selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a methoxy group, a sulfo group, and an amino group. It is a phenylamino group having one substituent. The phenylazo group preferably has 1 to 3 selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, an amino group, a hydroxy group and a carboxyethylamino group. It is a phenylazo group. The benzoyl group which may have a substituent is preferably a benzoyl group having one substituent selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an amino group, and a carboxyethylamino group. The benzoylamino group which may have a substituent is preferably a benzoylamino group having one substituent selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an amino group, and a carboxyethylamino group. The position of the substituent is not particularly limited, but when Xg 1 is a group having a phenyl group, one of the substituents is at the p-position with respect to the bond position indirectly bonded to the naphthalene skeleton represented by the formula (2). As a specific example, in the case of a phenylamino group, it is preferable that there is a substituent at the p-position with respect to the amino group.
 上記式(2)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩は、上記式(5)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩である場合、特に性能が向上するために好ましい。 The azo compound represented by the above formula (2) or a salt thereof is preferably the azo compound represented by the above formula (5) or a salt thereof because the performance is particularly improved.
 上記式(5)中、Agは式(2)中のAgと同じものを示す。RgおよびRgは各々独立に式(3)中のRgと同じものを示す。Xgは式(2)中のXgと同じものを示す。pおよびpは各々独立に式(2)中のpと同じものを示す。特に、p及びpは、それぞれ独立に1又は2であることが、偏光特性を向上させるために好ましい。 In the above formula (5), Ag 2 represents the same as Ag 1 in the formula (2). Rg 4 and Rg 5 independently represent the same as Rg 1 in the formula (3). Xg 2 represents the same as Xg 1 in the formula (2). p 2 and p 3 each independently represent the same as p 1 in equation (2). In particular, it is preferable that p 2 and p 3 are independently 1 or 2, respectively, in order to improve the polarization characteristics.
 上記偏光素子において、上記式(2)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩の含有量は、上記式(1)のアゾ化合物の含有量100質量部に対して、0.01~5000質量部であることが好ましく、より好ましくは0.1~3000質量部であり、10~1000質量部であり、40~400質量部であることがさらに好ましい。 In the polarizing element, the content of the azo compound represented by the above formula (2) or a salt thereof is 0.01 to 5000 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the content of the azo compound of the above formula (1). It is preferably 0.1 to 3000 parts by mass, 10 to 1000 parts by mass, and even more preferably 40 to 400 parts by mass.
 上記式(2)で示されるアゾ化合物又はその塩は、例えば特許文献7~特許文献12等に記載される方法により合成することができるが、これらに限定されない。 The azo compound represented by the above formula (2) or a salt thereof can be synthesized by the methods described in, for example, Patent Documents 7 to 12, but is not limited thereto.
 上記式(2)で表されるアゾ化合物の具体例としては、例えば、C.I.Direct Blue 34、C.I.Direct Blue 69、C.I.Direct Blue 70、C.I.Direct Blue 71、C.I.Direct Blue 72、C.I.Direct Blue 75、C.I.Direct Blue 78、C.I.Direct Blue 81、C.I.Direct Blue 82、C.I.Direct Blue 83、C.I.Direct Blue 186、C.I.Direct Blue 258、Benzo Fast Chrome Blue FG(C.I.34225)、Benzo Fast Blue BN(C.I.34120)、C.I.Direct Green 51、等のアゾ化合物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the azo compound represented by the above formula (2) include, for example, C.I. I. Direct Blue 34, C.I. I. Direct Blue 69, C.I. I. Direct Blue 70, C.I. I. Direct Blue 71, C.I. I. Direct Blue 72, C.I. I. Direct Blue 75, C.I. I. Direct Blue 78, C.I. I. Direct Blue 81, C.I. I. Direct Blue 82, C.I. I. Direct Blue 83, C.I. I. Direct Blue 186, C.I. I. Direct Blue 258, Benzo Fast Chrome Blue FG (CI 34225), Benzo Fast Blue BN (CI 34120), C.I. I. Examples thereof include azo compounds such as Direct Green 51.
 以下に、上記式(2)で表されるアゾ化合物の具体例を、遊離酸の形式で示す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Specific examples of the azo compound represented by the above formula (2) are shown below in the form of a free acid.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 上記偏光素子は、上記式(1)と上記式(2)で表されるアゾ化合物を組み合わせて含ませることにより、従来の無彩色偏光板よりも高いコントラスト、高い透過率および高い偏光度を有しつつも、白表示時および黒表示時の両方において無彩色を実現できる。一態様において、白表示時に高品位な紙のような白色、通称、ペーパーホワイトを実現できる。一態様において、黒表示時に無彩色の黒色、特に高級感のある明瞭な黒色を実現できる。 The polarizing element has higher contrast, higher transmittance and higher degree of polarization than the conventional achromatic polarizing plate by incorporating the azo compound represented by the above formula (1) and the above formula (2) in combination. However, achromatic color can be realized in both white display and black display. In one aspect, high-quality paper-like white, commonly known as paper white, can be realized when white is displayed. In one aspect, it is possible to realize an achromatic black color when displaying black, particularly a high-quality clear black color.
 上記偏光素子は、より性能を向上させるためには、式(1)及び式(2)で表されるアゾ化合物に加えて、上記式(6)、または式(7)で表されるアゾ化合物をさらに含有していることが好ましい。 In order to further improve the performance of the polarizing element, in addition to the azo compounds represented by the formulas (1) and (2), the azo compounds represented by the above formula (6) or the formula (7). It is preferable that the compound is further contained.
 上記式(6)、または式(7)で表されるアゾ化合物は、特に400~500nmの透過率に影響を与える。偏光素子において、400~500nmの短波長側の透過率と偏光度(コントラスト)は、黒表示時の黒色の青色化や白表示時の白色の黄色化に影響を与える。式(6)、または式(7)で表されるアゾ化合物は、偏光素子の平行位における短波長側の透過率の低下を抑えつつも、400~500nmの偏光特性(二色性)を向上させ、白表示時の黄色っぽさと黒表示時の青っぽさをさらに低下させることができる。つまり、偏光素子は、式(6)、または式(7)で表されるアゾ化合物をさらに含有することにより、視感度補正後の単体透過率が35~66%の範囲において、単体でより無彩色性を示し、白表示時に、より高品位な紙のような白色を表現し、さらに偏光度が向上し、黒表示時に、より無彩色な黒色を表現するため好ましい。 The azo compound represented by the above formula (6) or formula (7) particularly affects the transmittance at 400 to 500 nm. In the polarizing element, the transmittance and the degree of polarization (contrast) on the short wavelength side of 400 to 500 nm affect the bluening of black when displaying black and the yellowing of white when displaying white. The azo compound represented by the formula (6) or the formula (7) improves the polarization characteristics (dichroism) of 400 to 500 nm while suppressing the decrease in the transmittance on the short wavelength side in the parallel position of the polarizing element. It is possible to further reduce the yellowishness when displaying white and the bluishness when displaying black. That is, by further containing the azo compound represented by the formula (6) or the formula (7), the polarizing element is more achromatic in the range of the single transmittance after the luminosity factor correction in the range of 35 to 66%. It is preferable because it exhibits chromaticity, expresses a higher-quality paper-like white color when displayed in white, further improves the degree of polarization, and expresses a more achromatic black color when displayed in black.
 上記式(6)について説明する。上記式(6)中、Ay61はスルホ基、カルボキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、C1~4のアルキル基、又はC1~4のアルコキシ基であり、好ましくはスルホ基又はカルボキシ基である。Ry61~Ry64は、各々独立に、水素原子、スルホ基、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基であり、好ましくは水素原子、スルホ基、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基であり、さらに好ましくは水素原子、メチル基、メトキシ基である。kは1~3の整数を示す。 The above equation (6) will be described. In the above formula (6), Ay 61 is a sulfo group, a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group of C1 to 4 or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, preferably a sulfo group or a carboxy group. Ry 61 to Ry 64 are C1 to 4 alkoxy groups having hydrogen atoms, sulfo groups, C1 to 4 alkyl groups, C1 to 4 alkoxy groups, and sulfo groups, respectively, preferably hydrogen atoms and sulfo groups. It is a group, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, and more preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or a methoxy group. k represents an integer of 1 to 3.
 上記偏光素子において、上記式(6)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩の含有量は、式(1)のアゾ化合物の含有量100質量部に対して、0.01~300質量部であることが好ましく、より好ましくは0.1~200質量部であり、30~200質量部であることがさらに好ましい。 In the polarizing element, the content of the azo compound represented by the above formula (6) or a salt thereof is 0.01 to 300 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the content of the azo compound of the formula (1). It is preferable, more preferably 0.1 to 200 parts by mass, and even more preferably 30 to 200 parts by mass.
 式(6)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩は、例えばWO2007/138980等に記載される方法により合成することができるが、市販のものを入手することもできる。式(6)で表されるアゾ化合物の具体例としては、例えば、C.I.Direct Yellow 4、C.I.Direct Yellow 12、C.I.Direct Yellow 72、およびC.I.Direct Orange 39、並びにWO2007/138980等に記載されるスチルベン構造を有するアゾ化合物等があるが、これらに限定されるものではない。 The azo compound represented by the formula (6) or a salt thereof can be synthesized by the method described in, for example, WO2007 / 138980, but commercially available ones can also be obtained. Specific examples of the azo compound represented by the formula (6) include, for example, C.I. I. Direct Yellow 4, C.I. I. Direct Yellow 12, C.I. I. Direct Yellow 72, and C.I. I. There are, but are not limited to, Direct Orange 39 and azo compounds having a stilbene structure described in WO2007 / 138980 and the like.
 式(6)で表されるアゾ化合物のさらなる具体例を以下に挙げる。なお、化合物例は、遊離酸の形態で表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Further specific examples of the azo compound represented by the formula (6) are given below. Examples of compounds are represented in the form of free acids.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 次に、式(7)で表されるアゾ化合物について説明する。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Next, the azo compound represented by the formula (7) will be described.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 式(7)中、Ay71及びAy72は各々独立に、置換基を有してもよいナフチル基、又は置換基を有してもよいフェニル基であり、s、tは各々独立に0又は1であり、Ry71、Ry72、Ry77、Ry78は各々独立に水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基であり、Ry73~Ry76は各々独立に水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基である。偏光特性を向上させるためs又はtのいずれかは1であることが好ましい。 In formula (7), Ay 71 and Ay 72 are naphthyl groups which may have a substituent or a phenyl group which may have a substituent, respectively, and s and t are 0 or 0 or t, respectively. 1, Ry 71 , Ry 72 , Ry 77 , and Ry 78 are independent hydrogen atoms, C1 to 4 alkyl groups, and C1 to 4 alkoxy groups, respectively, and Ry 73 to Ry 76 are independent hydrogen atoms, respectively. It is an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, and an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group. Either s or t is preferably 1 in order to improve the polarization characteristics.
 置換基を有してもよいフェニル基は、好ましくは、スルホ基、カルボキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、ハロゲン基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、C1~4のアルキル置換アミノ基、及びC1~4のアルキル置換アシルアミノ基からなる群から選択される1以上の置換基を有するフェニル基である。フェニル基が置換基を2つ以上有する場合は、その置換基の少なくとも1つがスルホ基、又はカルボキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基であり、その他の置換基が、スルホ基、水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基、カルボキシ基、クロロ基、ブロモ基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、C1~4のアルキル置換アミノ基、又はC1~4のアルキル置換アシルアミノ基であることが好ましい。その他の置換基は、より好ましくは、スルホ基、水素原子、メチル基、エチル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、カルボキシ基、スルホエトキシ基、スルホプロポキシ基、スルホブトキシ基、クロロ基、ニトロ基、又はアミノ基であり、特に好ましくはスルホ基、カルボキシ基、水素原子、メチル基、メトキシ基、スルホエトキシ基、スルホプロポキシ基、又はスルホブトキシ基である。置換位置は特に限定されないが、2-位のみ、4-位のみ、2-位と6-位の組合せ、2-位と4-位の組合せ、3-位と5-位の組合せが好ましく、特に好ましくは、2-位のみ、4-位のみ、2-位と4-位の組合せ、又は3-位と5-位の組合せである。なお、2-位のみ、4-位のみは、2-位又は4-位のみに水素原子以外の置換基を1つ有することを示す The phenyl group which may have a substituent is preferably a sulfo group, a carboxy group, a C1 to 4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group, a C1 to 4 alkyl group, a C1 to 4 alkoxy group, a halogen group, or a nitro. A phenyl group having one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of a group, an amino group, an alkyl-substituted amino group of C1-4, and an alkyl-substituted acylamino group of C1-4. When the phenyl group has two or more substituents, at least one of the substituents is a sulfo group, or a carboxy group, or a C1-4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group, and the other substituent is a sulfo group, Hydrogen atom, alkyl group of C1-4, alkoxy group of C1-4, alkoxy group of C1-4 having sulfo group, carboxy group, chloro group, bromo group, nitro group, amino group, alkyl substituted amino of C1-4 It is preferably a group or an alkyl-substituted acylamino group of C1-4. Other substituents are more preferably a sulfo group, a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfoethoxy group, a sulfopropoxy group, a sulfobutoxy group, a chloro group, a nitro group, or It is an amino group, particularly preferably a sulfo group, a carboxy group, a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a methoxy group, a sulfoethoxy group, a sulfopropoxy group, or a sulfobutoxy group. The substitution position is not particularly limited, but only the 2-position, the 4-position only, the combination of the 2-position and the 6-position, the combination of the 2-position and the 4-position, and the combination of the 3-position and the 5-position are preferable. Particularly preferred are 2-position only, 4-position only, combination of 2-position and 4-position, or combination of 3-position and 5-position. In addition, only the 2-position and only the 4-position indicate that only the 2-position or the 4-position has one substituent other than the hydrogen atom.
 Ay71、またはAy72において、置換基を有してもよいフェニル基は、好ましくは下記式(8)で表される。下記式(8)中の*は、上記式(7)の末端アミド基のNH部位との結合位置を示す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
In Ay 71 or Ay 72 , the phenyl group which may have a substituent is preferably represented by the following formula (8). * In the following formula (8) indicates the bonding position of the terminal amide group in the above formula (7) with the NH site.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
 式(8)において、Ry81及びRy82の一方はスルホ基、カルボキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基であり、他方は水素原子、スルホ基、カルボキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、ハロゲン基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、C1~4のアルキル置換アミノ基、又はC1~4のアルキル置換アシルアミノ基である。好ましくは、Ry81及びRy82の一方がスルホ基又はカルボキシ基であり、他方は水素原子、スルホ基、カルボキシ基、メチル基、又はメトキシ基である。 In formula (8), one of Ry 81 and Ry 82 is a sulfo group, a carboxy group, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group, and the other is a C1 having a hydrogen atom, a sulfo group, a carboxy group, or a sulfo group. Alkoxy groups of up to 4; alkyl groups of C1-4, alkoxy groups of C1-4, halogen groups, nitro groups, amino groups, alkyl-substituted amino groups of C1-4, or alkyl-substituted acylamino groups of C1-4. Preferably, one of Ry 81 and Ry 82 is a sulfo group or a carboxy group, and the other is a hydrogen atom, a sulfo group, a carboxy group, a methyl group, or a methoxy group.
 Ay71、またはAy72において、置換基を有してもよいナフチル基は、ヒドロキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基及びスルホ基からなる群から選択される1以上の置換基を有してもよいナフチル基であることが好ましい。 In Ay 71 , or Ay 72 , the naphthyl group which may have a substituent has one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of a hydroxy group, a C1-4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group, and a sulfo group. It is preferably a naphthyl group which may be used.
 Ay71、またはAy72において、置換基を有してもよいナフチル基は、好ましくは、下記式(9)に表されるナフチル基である。下記式(9)中の*は、上記式(7)の末端アミド基のNH部位との結合位置を示す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
In Ay 71 or Ay 72 , the naphthyl group which may have a substituent is preferably a naphthyl group represented by the following formula (9). * In the following formula (9) indicates the bonding position of the terminal amide group of the above formula (7) with the NH site.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
 式(9)において、Ry91は水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基、又はスルホ基である。fは1~3の整数である。スルホ基の位置はナフタレン環のいずれのベンゼン核に有していてもよい。好ましくは、Ry91は水素原子であり、fは2である。スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基としては、直鎖アルコキシ基が好ましく、スルホ基の置換位置はアルコキシ基末端が好ましい。スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基は、より好ましくは3-スルホプロポキシ基、及び4-スルホブトキシ基である。ナフチル基が有する置換基の位置は特に限定されないが、アゾ基の置換位置が2位とした場合、置換基が2個の場合は4-位と8-位、5-位と7-位、又は6-位と8-位の組み合わせが好ましく、置換基が3個の場合は3-位と5-位と7-位、3-位と6-位と8-位が好ましい。 In the formula (9), Ry 91 is a C1-4 alkoxy group or a sulfo group having a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group and a sulfo group. f is an integer of 1 to 3. The position of the sulfo group may be present in any benzene nucleus of the naphthalene ring. Preferably, Ry 91 is a hydrogen atom and f is 2. As the alkoxy group of C1 to C4 having a sulfo group, a linear alkoxy group is preferable, and the substituent of the sulfo group is preferably an alkoxy group terminal. The C1-4 alkoxy groups having a sulfo group are more preferably a 3-sulfopropoxy group and a 4-sulfobutoxy group. The position of the substituent of the naphthyl group is not particularly limited, but when the substitution position of the azo group is the 2-position, when there are two substituents, the 4-position and the 8-position, the 5-position and the 7-position, and so on. Alternatively, a combination of the 6-position and the 8-position is preferable, and when the number of substituents is 3, the 3-position, the 5-position and the 7-position, and the 3-position, the 6-position and the 8-position are preferable.
 式(7)中、Ry71、Ry72、Ry77、Ry78は各々独立に水素原子、C1~4のアルコキシ基、C1~4のアルキル基である。好ましくは、水素原子、メチル基、エチル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基である。 In formula (7), Ry 71 , Ry 72 , Ry 77 , and Ry 78 are independently hydrogen atoms, C1 to 4 alkoxy groups, and C1 to 4 alkyl groups, respectively. Preferred are a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a methoxy group, and an ethoxy group.
 式(7)中、Ry73~Ry76は各々独立に水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基である。Ry73~Ry76は各々独立に、好ましくは、水素原子、メチル基、エチル基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、3-スルホプロポキシ基、又は4-スルホブトキシ基であり、さらに好ましくは、水素原子、メチル基、エチル基、メトキシ基、又は3-スルホプロポキシ基である。Ry73~Ry76の位置としては、2-位のみ、5-位のみ、2-位と6-位の組合せ、2-位と5-位の組合せ、3-位と5-位の組合せが好ましく、さらに好ましくは、2-位のみ、5-位のみ、2-位と5-位の組合せである。なお、2-位のみ、5-位のみは、2-位又は5-位のみに水素原子以外の置換基を1つ有することを示す。 In the formula (7), Ry 73 to Ry 76 are independent alkoxy groups of C1 to 4 having a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, and a sulfo group, respectively. Ry 73 to Ry 76 are each independently, preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a 3-sulfopropoxy group, or a 4-sulfobutoxy group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom. It is a methyl group, an ethyl group, a methoxy group, or a 3-sulfopropoxy group. The positions of Ry 73 to Ry 76 include 2-position only, 5-position only, 2-position and 6-position combination, 2-position and 5-position combination, and 3-position and 5-position combination. Preferably, more preferably, only the 2-position, only the 5-position, and the combination of the 2-position and the 5-position are used. In addition, only the 2-position and only the 5-position indicate that only the 2-position or the 5-position has one substituent other than the hydrogen atom.
 式(7)で表されるアゾ化合物は、下記式(10)で表されることが好ましい。尚、Ay71、Ay72、Ry71~Ry78、s、tは式(7)で説明したものと同じものを示す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
The azo compound represented by the formula (7) is preferably represented by the following formula (10). Note that Ay 71 , Ay 72 , Ry 71 to Ry 78 , s, and t are the same as those described in the equation (7).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
 次に、式(7)で表されるアゾ化合物の具体例を以下に挙げる。なお、式中のスルホ基、カルボキシ基及びヒドロキシ基は遊離酸の形で表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Next, specific examples of the azo compound represented by the formula (7) will be given below. The sulfo group, carboxy group and hydroxy group in the formula are represented in the form of free acid.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
 上記式(7)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩は、非特許文献2に記載されるような通常のアゾ染料の製法に従い、ジアゾ化、カップリングを行い、特許文献13に記載されるようなウレイド化剤と反応させることにより製造することができる。 The azo compound represented by the above formula (7) or a salt thereof is diazotized and coupled according to a usual method for producing an azo dye as described in Non-Patent Document 2, and is described in Patent Document 13. It can be produced by reacting with a azo agent.
 具体的な製造方法の例としては、下記式(A)で示されるような置換基を有してもよい芳香族アミン類を特許文献13と同様の方法により下記式(B)で示される酸クロライドと反応させ、続いて還元反応を実施し、下記式(C)で示されるアミノベンゾイルアニリン類を得る。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
As an example of a specific production method, aromatic amines which may have a substituent as represented by the following formula (A) are represented by an acid represented by the following formula (B) by the same method as in Patent Document 13. The reaction with chloride is carried out, followed by a reduction reaction to obtain aminobenzoylanilines represented by the following formula (C).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
 式(A)中、Ay71は上記式(7)におけるものと同じものを示す。式(B)中、Ry71及びRy72は上記式(7)におけるものと同じものを示す。式(C)中、Ay71、Ry71及びRy72は上記式(7)におけるものと同じものを示す。 In the formula (A), Ay 71 represents the same as that in the above formula (7). In the formula (B), Ry 71 and Ry 72 are the same as those in the above formula (7). In the formula (C), Ay 71 , Ry 71 and Ry 72 are the same as those in the above formula (7).
 次いで、上記式(C)で示される置換基を有するアミノベンゾイルアニリン類を非特許文献2と同様の方法によりジアゾ化し、下記式(D)のアニリン類とカップリングさせ、下記式(E)で示されるモノアゾアミノ化合物を得る。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Next, aminobenzoylanilines having a substituent represented by the above formula (C) are diazotized by the same method as in Non-Patent Document 2, coupled with the anilines of the following formula (D), and the following formula (E) is used. Obtain the monoazoamino compound shown.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
 式(D)中、Ry73及びRy74は上記式(7)におけるものと同じものを示す。式(E)中、Ay71、Ry71~Ry74は上記式(7)におけるものと同じものを示す。 In the formula (D), Ry 73 and Ry 74 represent the same as those in the above formula (7). In the formula (E), Ay 71 and Ry 71 to Ry 74 are the same as those in the above formula (7).
 続いて下記式(F)で示されるような置換基を有してもよい芳香族アミン類を特許文献1と同様の方法により下記式(G)で示される酸クロライドと反応させ、続いて還元反応を実施し、下記式(H)で示されるアミノベンゾイルアニリン類を得る。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
Subsequently, aromatic amines which may have a substituent as represented by the following formula (F) are reacted with the acid chloride represented by the following formula (G) by the same method as in Patent Document 1, and subsequently reduced. The reaction is carried out to obtain aminobenzoylanilines represented by the following formula (H).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
 式(F)中、Ay72は上記式(7)におけるものと同じものを示す。式(G)中、Ry77及びRy78は上記式(7)におけるものと同じものを示す。式(H)中、Ay72、Ry77及びRy78は上記式(7)におけるものと同じものを示す。 In the formula (F), Ay 72 represents the same as that in the above formula (7). In the formula (G), Ry 77 and Ry 78 represent the same as those in the above formula (7). In formula (H), Ay 72 , Ry 77 and Ry 78 are the same as those in formula (7) above.
 次いで、上記式(H)で示される置換基を有するアミノベンゾイルアニリン類を非特許文献2と同様の方法によりジアゾ化し、下記式(I)のアニリン類とカップリングさせ、下記式(J)で示されるモノアゾアミノ化合物を得る。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Next, aminobenzoylanilines having a substituent represented by the above formula (H) are diazotized by the same method as in Non-Patent Document 2, coupled with the anilines of the following formula (I), and the following formula (J) is used. Obtain the monoazoamino compound shown.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
 上記式(I)中、Ry75及びRy76は上記式(7)におけるものと同じものを示す。式(J)中、Ay72、Ry75~Ry78は上記式(7)におけるものと同じものを示す。 In the above formula (I), Ry 75 and Ry 76 represent the same as those in the above formula (7). In the formula (J), Ay 72 and Ry 75 to Ry 78 are the same as those in the above formula (7).
 s、tが共に1である上記式(7)のアゾ化合物を得る為には、上記モノアゾアミノ化合物(E)と上記モノアゾアミノ化合物(J)をウレイド化剤であるクロロぎ酸フェニルと反応させることにより上記式(7)のアゾ化合物が得られる。sが1、tが0である上記式(7)のアゾ化合物を得る為には、下記式(K)で示される置換基を有してもよい芳香族アミン類を非特許文献2と同様の方法によりジアゾ化し、上記式(I)のアニリン類とカップリングさせ、下記式(L)で示されるモノアゾアミノ化合物を得る。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
In order to obtain the azo compound of the above formula (7) in which both s and t are 1, the monoazoamino compound (E) and the monoazoamino compound (J) are reacted with phenyl chloride, which is a ureidating agent. As a result, the azo compound of the above formula (7) can be obtained. In order to obtain the azo compound of the above formula (7) in which s is 1 and t is 0, aromatic amines which may have a substituent represented by the following formula (K) are the same as in Non-Patent Document 2. The monoazoamino compound represented by the following formula (L) is obtained by diazotizing by the method of the above method and coupling with the anilines of the above formula (I).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
 式(K)中、Ay72は上記式(7)におけるものと同じものを示す。式(L)中、Ay72、Ry75及びRy76は上記式(7)におけるものと同じものを示す。 In formula (K), Ay 72 represents the same as in formula (7) above. In the formula (L), Ay 72 , Ry 75 and Ry 76 are the same as those in the above formula (7).
 次いで、上記モノアゾアミノ化合物(E)と上記モノアゾアミノ化合物(L)を、ウレイド化剤であるクロロギ酸フェニルと反応させることにより式(7)のアゾ化合物が得られる。 Next, the azo compound of the formula (7) is obtained by reacting the monoazoamino compound (E) and the monoazoamino compound (L) with phenylchloroformate, which is a ureidating agent.
 sが0、tが1である上記式(7)のアゾ化合物を得る為には、下記式(M)で示される置換基を有してもよい芳香族アミン類を非特許文献2と同様の方法によりジアゾ化し、上記式(D)のアニリン類とカップリングさせ、下記式(N)で示されるモノアゾアミノ化合物を得る。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
In order to obtain the azo compound of the above formula (7) in which s is 0 and t is 1, aromatic amines which may have a substituent represented by the following formula (M) are the same as in Non-Patent Document 2. The monoazoamino compound represented by the following formula (N) is obtained by diazotizing by the method of the above method and coupling with the anilines of the above formula (D).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
 式中、Ay71は上記式(7)におけるものと同じものを示す。式(N)中、Ay71、Ry73、Ry74は、上記式(7)におけるものと同じものを示す。 In the formula, Ay 71 represents the same as that in the above formula (7). In the formula (N), Ay 71 , Ry 73 , and Ry 74 represent the same as those in the above formula (7).
 次いで、上記モノアゾアミノ化合物(J)と上記モノアゾアミノ化合物(N)を、ウレイド化剤であるクロロギ酸フェニルと反応させることにより式(7)のアゾ化合物が得られる。 Next, the azo compound of the formula (7) is obtained by reacting the monoazoamino compound (J) and the monoazoamino compound (N) with phenylchloroformate, which is a ureidating agent.
 ジアゾ化工程は、ジアゾ成分の塩酸、硫酸などの鉱酸水溶液又はけん濁液に亜硝酸ナトリウムなどの亜硝酸塩を混合するという順法によるか、あるいはジアゾ成分の中性もしくは弱アルカリ性の水溶液に亜硝酸塩を加えておき、これと鉱酸を混合するという逆法によって行われる。ジアゾ化の温度は、-10~40℃が適当である。また、アニリン類とのカップリング工程は塩酸、酢酸などの酸性水溶液と上記各ジアゾ液を混合し、温度が-10~40℃でpH2~7の酸性条件で行われることが好ましい。 The diazotization step is carried out by the normal method of mixing a mineral acid aqueous solution such as hydrochloric acid or sulfuric acid of the diazo component or a nitrite such as sodium nitrite with a turbid solution, or a neutral or weakly alkaline aqueous solution of the diazo component. This is done by the reverse method of adding nitrate and mixing it with mineral acid. The temperature of diazotization is preferably −10 to 40 ° C. Further, it is preferable that the coupling step with anilines is carried out by mixing an acidic aqueous solution such as hydrochloric acid or acetic acid with each of the above diazo solutions at a temperature of −10 to 40 ° C. and under acidic conditions of pH 2 to 7.
 カップリングして得られたモノアゾアミノ化合物(E)、モノアゾアミノ化合物(J)、モノアゾアミノ化合物(L)、及びモノアゾアミノ化合物(N)は酸析や塩析により析出させ濾過して取り出すか、溶液又は懸濁液のまま次の工程へ進むこともできる。ジアゾニウム塩が難溶性で懸濁液となっている場合は濾過し、プレスケーキとして次のカップリング工程で使うこともできる。 The monoazoamino compound (E), monoazoamino compound (J), monoazoamino compound (L), and monoazoamino compound (N) obtained by coupling are precipitated by acidification or salting out and filtered out. The solution or suspension can be used as it is to proceed to the next step. If the diazonium salt is sparingly soluble and is in suspension, it can be filtered and used as a press cake in the next coupling step.
 クロロギ酸フェニルを用いたウレイド化反応の具体的な条件は、特許文献13の第57頁で示される製法により、温度が10~90℃、pH3~11が好ましく、さらに好ましくは20~80℃、pH4~10、特に好ましくは、20~70℃、pH6~9である。ウレイド化剤としては、クロロギ酸フェニルの他、ホスゲン、トリホスゲン、クロロギ酸エチル、クロロギ酸ブチル、クロロギ酸イソブチル、クロロギ酸4-ニトロフェニル、クロロギ酸4-フルオロフェニル、クロロギ酸4-クロロフェニル、クロロギ酸4-ブロモフェニル、炭酸ジフェニル、炭酸ビス(2-メトキシフェニル)、炭酸ビス(ペンタフルオロフェニル)、炭酸ビス(4-ニトロフェニル)、及び1,1’-カルボニルジイミダゾールを用いることができるがこれらに限定されない。ウレイド化剤は、好ましくは、クロロギ酸フェニル、クロロギ酸4-ニトロフェニル、クロロギ酸4-クロロフェニル、炭酸ジフェニル、炭酸ビス(4-ニトロフェニル)であり、より好ましくは、クロロギ酸フェニル、クロロギ酸4-ニトロフェニルである。 The specific conditions of the ureidoation reaction using phenyl chloroformate are preferably a temperature of 10 to 90 ° C. and a pH of 3 to 11, more preferably 20 to 80 ° C., according to the production method shown on page 57 of Patent Document 13. The pH is 4 to 10, particularly preferably 20 to 70 ° C. and pH 6 to 9. Examples of the ureidating agent include phenyl chloroformate, phosgene, triphosgene, ethyl chloroformate, butyl chloroformate, isobutyl chloroformate, 4-nitrophenyl chloroformate, 4-fluorophenyl chloroformate, 4-chlorophenyl chloroformate, and chloroformic acid. 4-Bromophenyl, diphenyl carbonate, bis carbonate (2-methoxyphenyl), bis carbonate (pentafluorophenyl), bis carbonate (4-nitrophenyl), and 1,1'-carbonyldiimidazole can be used. Not limited to. The ureidating agent is preferably phenyl chloroformate, 4-nitrophenyl chloroformate, 4-chlorophenyl chloroformate, diphenyl carbonate, bis (4-nitrophenyl) carbonate, and more preferably phenyl chloroformate, 4 chloroformic acid -Nitrophenyl.
 ウレイド化反応終了後、得られた式(7)のアゾ化合物を、塩析により析出させ濾過して取り出す。精製が必要な場合には、塩析を繰り返すか又は有機溶媒を使用して水中から析出させればよい。精製に使用する有機溶媒としては、例えばメタノール、エタノール等のアルコール類、アセトン等のケトン類等の水溶性有機溶媒が挙げられる。 After completion of the ureido reaction, the obtained azo compound of the formula (7) is precipitated by salting out, filtered and taken out. If purification is required, salting out may be repeated or precipitated from water using an organic solvent. Examples of the organic solvent used for purification include water-soluble organic solvents such as alcohols such as methanol and ethanol, and ketones such as acetone.
 式(7)で表されるアゾ化合物を合成するための出発原料であるAy71-NH及びAy72-NHで示される芳香族アミン類は、ナフチルアミン類又はアニリン類である。 The aromatic amines represented by Ay 71- NH 2 and Ay 72- NH 2 , which are starting materials for synthesizing the azo compound represented by the formula (7), are naphthylamines or anilines.
 ナフチルアミン類としては、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基、及びスルホ基からなる群から選択される1以上を有するナフチルアミン類を用いることが好ましい。ナフチルアミン類としては、例えば、4-アミノナフタレンスルホン酸、7-アミノナフタレン-3-スルホン酸、1-アミノナフタレン-6-スルホン酸、1-アミノナフタレン-7-スルホン酸、7-アミノナフタレン-1,3-ジスルホン酸、6-アミノナフタレン-1,3-ジスルホン酸、7-アミノナフタレン-1,5-ジスルホン酸、7-アミノナフタレン-1,3,6-トリスルホン酸等が挙げられる。7-アミノナフタレン-3-スルホン酸、6-アミノナフタレン-1,3-ジスルホン酸、7-アミノナフタレン-1,4-ジスルホン酸、7-アミノナフタレン-1,5-ジスルホン酸、2-アミノ-8-ヒドロキシ-ナフタレン-6-スルホン酸、3-アミノ-8-ヒドロキシナフタレン-6-スルホン酸、1-アミノナフタレン-3,6,8-トリスルホン酸、2-アミノ-5-ヒドロキシナフタレン-1,7-ジスルホン酸、1-アミノナフタレン-3,8-ジスルホン酸等が好ましい。 As the naphthylamines, it is preferable to use naphthylamines having one or more selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atoms, hydroxy groups, C1 to 4 alkoxy groups having a sulfo group, and sulfo groups. Examples of naphthylamines include 4-aminonaphthalenesulfonic acid, 7-aminonaphthalene-3-sulfonic acid, 1-aminonaphthalene-6-sulfonic acid, 1-aminonaphthalene-7-sulfonic acid, and 7-aminonaphthalene-1. , 3-Disulfonic acid, 6-aminonaphthalene-1,3-disulfonic acid, 7-aminonaphthalene-1,5-disulfonic acid, 7-aminonaphthalene-1,3,6-trisulfonic acid and the like. 7-Aminonaphthalene-3-sulfonic acid, 6-aminonaphthalene-1,3-disulfonic acid, 7-aminonaphthalene-1,4-disulfonic acid, 7-aminonaphthalene-1,5-disulfonic acid, 2-amino- 8-Hydroxy-naphthalen-6-sulfonic acid, 3-amino-8-hydroxynaphthalene-6-sulfonic acid, 1-aminonaphthalene-3,6,8-trisulfonic acid, 2-amino-5-hydroxynaphthalene-1 , 7-Disulfonic acid, 1-aminonaphthalene-3,8-disulfonic acid and the like are preferable.
 スルホ基及びスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を有するナフチルアミン類としては、例えば、7-アミノ-3-(3-スルホプロポキシ)ナフタレン-1-スルホン酸、7-アミノ-3-(4-スルホブトキシ)ナフタレン-1-スルホン酸、7-アミノ-4-(3-スルホプロポキシ)ナフタレン-2-スルホン酸、7-アミノ-4-(4-スルホブトキシ)ナフタレン-2-スルホン酸、6-アミノ-4-(3-スルホプロポキシ)ナフタレン-2-スルホン酸、6-アミノ-4-(4-スルホブトキシ)ナフタレン-2-スルホン酸、2-アミノ-5-(3-スルホプロポキシ)ナフタレン-1,7-ジスルホン酸、6-アミノ-4-(3-スルホプロポキシ)ナフタレン-2,7-ジスルホン酸、7-アミノ-3-(3-スルホプロポキシ)ナフタレン-1,5-ジスルホン酸などが挙げられる。 Examples of naphthylamines having a sulfo group and a C1-4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group include 7-amino-3- (3-sulfopropoxy) naphthalene-1-sulfonic acid and 7-amino-3- (4-amino-3- (4-). Sulfobutoxy) Naphthalene-1-sulfonic acid, 7-amino-4- (3-sulfopropoxy) naphthalene-2-sulfonic acid, 7-amino-4- (4-sulfobutoxy) naphthalene-2-sulfonic acid, 6- Amino-4- (3-sulfopropoxy) naphthalene-2-sulfonic acid, 6-amino-4- (4-sulfobutoxy) naphthalene-2-sulfonic acid, 2-amino-5- (3-sulfopropoxy) naphthalene- 1,7-Disulfonic acid, 6-amino-4- (3-sulfopropoxy) naphthalene-2,7-disulfonic acid, 7-amino-3- (3-sulfopropoxy) naphthalene-1,5-disulfonic acid, etc. Can be mentioned.
 アニリン類としては、4-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、3-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、2-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、4-アミノ安息香酸、2-アミノ-5-メチルベンゼンスルホン酸、2-アミノ-5-エチルベンゼンスルホン酸、2-アミノ-5-プロピルベンゼンスルホン酸、2-アミノ-5-ブチルベンゼンスルホン酸、4-アミノ-3-メチルベンゼンスルホン酸、4-アミノ-3-エチルベンゼンスルホン酸、4-アミノ-3-プロピルベンゼンスルホン酸、4-アミノ-3-ブチルベンゼンスルホン酸、2-アミノ-5-メトキシベンゼンスルホン酸、2-アミノ-5-エトキシベンゼンスルホン酸、2-アミノ-5-プロポキシベンゼンスルホン酸、2-アミノ-5-ブトキシベンゼンスルホン酸、4-アミノ-3-メトキシベンゼンスルホン酸、4-アミノ-3-エトキシベンゼンスルホン酸、4-アミノ-3-プロポキシベンゼンスルホン酸、4-アミノ-3-ブトキシベンゼンスルホン酸、2-アミノ-4-スルホ安息香酸、2-アミノ-5-スルホ安息香酸、4-アミノ-3-スルホ安息香酸、5-アミノ-2-クロロ安息香酸、5-アミノイソフタル酸、2-アミノ-5-クロロベンゼンスルホン酸、2-アミノ-5-ブロモベンゼンスルホン酸、2-アミノ-5-ニトロベンゼンスルホン酸、2,5-ジアミノベンゼンスルホン酸、2-アミノ-5-ジメチルアミノベンゼンスルホン酸、2-アミノ-5-ジエチルアミノベンゼンスルホン酸、5-アセトアミド-2-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、4-アミノベンゼン-1,3-ジスルホン酸、2-アミノベンゼン-1,4-ジスルホン酸、4-アミノ-2-メチルベンゼンスルホン酸、2-(4-アミノフェノキシ)エタン-1-スルホン酸、3-(4-アミノフェノキシ)プロパン-1-スルホン酸、4-(4-アミノフェノキシ)ブタン-1-スルホン酸、2-(3-アミノフェノキシ)エタン-1-スルホン酸、3-(3-アミノフェノキシ)プロパン-1-スルホン酸、4-(3-アミノフェノキシ)ブタン-1-スルホン酸、2-アミノ-5-(2-スルホエトキシ)ベンゼンスルホン酸、2-アミノ-5-(3-スルホプロポキシ)ベンゼンスルホン酸、2-アミノ-5-(4-スルホブトキシ)ベンゼンスルホン酸、2-アミノ-5-(2-スルホエトキシ)安息香酸、2-アミノ-5-(3-スルホプロポキシ)安息香酸、2-アミノ-5-(4-スルホブトキシ)安息香酸、4-アミノ-3-(2-スルホエトキシ)ベンゼンスルホン酸、4-アミノ-3-(3-スルホプロポキシ)ベンゼンスルホン酸、4-アミノ-3-(4-スルホブトキシ)ベンゼンスルホン酸、4-アミノ-3-(2-スルホエトキシ)安息香酸、4-アミノ-3-(3-スルホプロポキシ)安息香酸、4-アミノ-3-(4-スルホブトキシ)安息香酸、2-(4-アミノ-3-メチルフェノキシ)エタン-1-スルホン酸、3-(4-アミノ-3-メチルフェノキシ)プロパン-1-スルホン酸、4-(4-アミノ-3-メチルフェノキシ)ブタン-1-スルホン酸、2-(4-アミノ-3-エチルフェノキシ)エタン-1-スルホン酸、3-(4-アミノ-3-エチルフェノキシ)プロパン-1-スルホン酸、4-(4-アミノ-3-エチルフェノキシ)ブタン-1-スルホン酸、2-(4-アミノ-3-プロピルフェノキシ)エタン-1-スルホン酸、3-(4-アミノ-3-プロピルフェノキシ)プロパン-1-スルホン酸、4-(4-アミノ-3-プロピルフェノキシ)ブタン-1-スルホン酸、2-(4-アミノ-3-ブチルフェノキシ)エタン-1-スルホン酸、3-(4-アミノ-3-ブチルフェノキシ)プロパン-1-スルホン酸、4-(4-アミノ-3-ブチルフェノキシ)ブタン-1-スルホン酸、2-(4-アミノ-3-メトキシフェノキシ)エタン-1-スルホン酸、3-(4-アミノ-3-メトキシフェノキシ)プロパン-1-スルホン酸、4-(4-アミノ-3-メトキシフェノキシ)ブタン-1-スルホン酸、2-(4-アミノ-3-エトキシフェノキシ)エタン-1-スルホン酸、3-(4-アミノ-3-エトキシフェノキシ)プロパン-1-スルホン酸、4-(4-アミノ-3-エトキシフェノキシ)ブタン-1-スルホン酸、2-(4-アミノ-3-プロポキシフェノキシ)エタン-1-スルホン酸、3-(4-アミノ-3-プロポキシフェノキシ)プロパン-1-スルホン酸、4-(4-アミノ-3-プロポキシフェノキシ)ブタン-1-スルホン酸、2-(4-アミノ-3-ブトキシフェノキシ)エタン-1-スルホン酸、3-(4-アミノ-3-ブトキシフェノキシ)プロパン-1-スルホン酸、4-(4-アミノ-3-ブトキシフェノキシ)ブタン-1-スルホン酸、等が挙げられる。これらの芳香族アミン類はアミノ基が保護されていても良い。保護基としては、例えばω-メタンスルホン基が挙げられる。 Examples of anilins include 4-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 3-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 2-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 4-aminobenzoic acid, 2-amino-5-methylbenzenesulfonic acid, 2-amino-5-ethylbenzene. Sulfonic acid, 2-amino-5-propylbenzene sulfonic acid, 2-amino-5-butylbenzene sulfonic acid, 4-amino-3-methylbenzenesulfonic acid, 4-amino-3-ethylbenzenesulfonic acid, 4-amino- 3-propylbenzene sulfonic acid, 4-amino-3-butylbenzene sulfonic acid, 2-amino-5-methoxybenzene sulfonic acid, 2-amino-5-ethoxybenzene sulfonic acid, 2-amino-5-propoxybenzene sulfonic acid , 2-amino-5-butoxybenzene sulfonic acid, 4-amino-3-methoxybenzene sulfonic acid, 4-amino-3-ethoxybenzene sulfonic acid, 4-amino-3-propoxybenzene sulfonic acid, 4-amino-3 -Butoxybenzene sulfonic acid, 2-amino-4-sulfobenzoic acid, 2-amino-5-sulfobenzoic acid, 4-amino-3-sulfobenzoic acid, 5-amino-2-chlorobenzoic acid, 5-aminoisophthal Acid, 2-amino-5-chlorobenzene sulfonic acid, 2-amino-5-bromobenzene sulfonic acid, 2-amino-5-nitrobenzene sulfonic acid, 2,5-diaminobenzene sulfonic acid, 2-amino-5-dimethylamino Benzenesulfonic acid, 2-amino-5-diethylaminobenzenesulfonic acid, 5-acetamide-2-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 4-aminobenzene-1,3-disulfonic acid, 2-aminobenzene-1,4-disulfonic acid, 4-Amino-2-methylbenzenesulfonic acid, 2- (4-aminophenoxy) ethane-1-sulfonic acid, 3- (4-aminophenoxy) propan-1-sulfonic acid, 4- (4-aminophenoxy) butane -1-Sulfonic acid, 2- (3-aminophenoxy) ethane-1-sulfonic acid, 3- (3-aminophenoxy) propan-1-sulfonic acid, 4- (3-aminophenoxy) butane-1-sulfonic acid , 2-Amino-5- (2-sulfoethoxy) benzenesulfonic acid, 2-amino-5- (3-sulfopropoxy) benzenesulfonic acid, 2-amino-5- (4-sulfobutoxy) benzenesulfonic acid, 2 -Amino-5- (2-sulfoethoxy) benzoic acid, 2-amino-5- (3-sulfopropoxy) rest Perfume, 2-amino-5- (4-sulfobutoxy) benzoic acid, 4-amino-3- (2-sulfoethoxy) benzenesulfonic acid, 4-amino-3- (3-sulfopropoxy) benzenesulfonic acid, 4-Amino-3- (4-sulfobutoxy) benzenesulfonic acid, 4-amino-3- (2-sulfoethoxy) benzoic acid, 4-amino-3- (3-sulfopropoxy) benzoic acid, 4-amino- 3- (4-sulfobutoxy) benzoic acid, 2- (4-amino-3-methylphenoxy) ethane-1-sulfonic acid, 3- (4-amino-3-methylphenoxy) propan-1-sulfonic acid, 4 -(4-Amino-3-methylphenoxy) butane-1-sulfonic acid, 2- (4-amino-3-ethylphenoxy) ethane-1-sulfonic acid, 3- (4-amino-3-ethylphenoxy) propane -1-Sulfonic acid, 4- (4-amino-3-ethylphenoxy) butane-1-sulfonic acid, 2- (4-amino-3-propylphenoxy) ethane-1-sulfonic acid, 3- (4-amino -3-propylphenoxy) Propane-1-sulfonic acid, 4- (4-amino-3-propylphenoxy) butane-1-sulfonic acid, 2- (4-amino-3-butylphenoxy) ethane-1-sulfonic acid , 3- (4-Amino-3-butylphenoxy) propan-1-sulfonic acid, 4- (4-amino-3-butylphenoxy) butane-1-sulfonic acid, 2- (4-amino-3-methoxyphenoxy) ) Etan-1-sulfonic acid, 3- (4-amino-3-methoxyphenoxy) propan-1-sulfonic acid, 4- (4-amino-3-methoxyphenoxy) butane-1-sulfonic acid, 2- (4) -Amino-3-ethoxyphenoxy) ethane-1-sulfonic acid, 3- (4-amino-3-ethoxyphenoxy) propan-1-sulfonic acid, 4- (4-amino-3-ethoxyphenoxy) butane-1- Sulfonic acid, 2- (4-amino-3-propoxyphenoxy) ethane-1-sulfonic acid, 3- (4-amino-3-propoxyphenoxy) propan-1-sulfonic acid, 4- (4-amino-3-) Propoxyphenoxy) butane-1-sulfonic acid, 2- (4-amino-3-butoxyphenoxy) ethane-1-sulfonic acid, 3- (4-amino-3-butoxyphenoxy) propan-1-sulfonic acid, 4- (4-Amino-3-butoxyphenoxy) butane-1-sulfonic acid, and the like can be mentioned. The amino groups of these aromatic amines may be protected. Examples of the protecting group include an ω-methanesulfon group.
 1次カップラである芳香族アミン類(D)及び(I)としては、アニリン、2-メチルアニリン、2-エチルアニリン、2-プロピルアニリン、2-ブチルアニリン、3-メチルアニリン、3-エチルアニリン、3-プロピルアニリン、3-ブチルアニリン、2,5-ジメチルアニリン、2,5-ジエチルアニリン、2-メトキシアニリン、2-エトキシアニリン、2-プロポキシアニリン、2-ブトキシアニリン、3-メトキシアニリン、3-エトキシアニリン、3-プロポキシアニリン、3-ブトキシアニリン、2-メトキシ-5-メチルアニリン、2,5-ジメトキシアニリン、3,5-ジメチルアニリン、2,6-ジメチルアニリン、3,5-ジメトキシアニリン、3-(2-アミノ-4-メチルフェノキシ)プロパン-1-スルホン酸、3-(2-アミノフェノキシ)プロパン-1-スルホン酸、4-(2-アミノ-4-メチルフェノキシ)ブタン-1-スルホン酸、4-(2-アミノフェノキシ)ブタン-1-スルホン酸、2-(2-アミノ-4-メチルフェノキシ)エタン―1-スルホン酸、2-(2-アミノフェノキシ)エタン-1-スルホン酸、3-(3-アミノ-4-メチルフェノキシ)プロパン-1-スルホン酸、3-(3-アミノフェノキシ)プロパン-1-スルホン酸、4-(3-アミノ-4-メチルフェノキシ)ブタン-1-スルホン酸、4-(3-アミノフェノキシ)ブタン-1-スルホン酸、2-(3-アミノ-4-メチルフェノキシ)エタン-1-スルホン酸、2-(3-アミノフェノキシ)エタン-1-スルホン酸、3-(2-アミノ-4-メトキシフェノキシ)プロパン-1-スルホン酸、4-(2-アミノ-4-メトキシフェノキシ)ブタン-1-スルホン酸、2-(2-アミノ-4-メトキシフェノキシ)エタン―1-スルホン酸、3-(3-アミノ-4-メトキシフェノキシ)プロパン-1-スルホン酸、4-(3-アミノ-4-メトキシフェノキシ)ブタン-1-スルホン酸、2-(3-アミノ-4-メトキシフェノキシ)エタン-1-スルホン酸、3-(2-アミノ-4-エトキシフェノキシ)プロパン-1-スルホン酸、4-(2-アミノ-4-エトキシフェノキシ)ブタン-1-スルホン酸、2-(2-アミノ-4-エトキシフェノキシ)エタン―1-スルホン酸、3-(3-アミノ-4-エトキシフェノキシ)プロパン-1-スルホン酸、4-(3-アミノ-4-エトキシフェノキシ)ブタン-1-スルホン酸、2-(3-アミノ-4-エトキシフェノキシ)エタン-1-スルホン酸等が挙げられる。これらの芳香族アミン類はアミノ基が保護されていてもよい。保護基としては、例えばω-メタンスルホン基が挙げられる。 The aromatic amines (D) and (I) that are the primary couplers include aniline, 2-methylaniline, 2-ethylaniline, 2-propylaniline, 2-butylaniline, 3-methylaniline, and 3-ethylaniline. , 3-propylaniline, 3-butylaniline, 2,5-dimethylaniline, 2,5-diethylaniline, 2-methoxyaniline, 2-ethoxyaniline, 2-propoxyaniline, 2-butoxyaniline, 3-methoxyaniline, 3-ethoxyaniline, 3-propoxyaniline, 3-butoxyaniline, 2-methoxy-5-methylaniline, 2,5-dimethoxyaniline, 3,5-dimethylaniline, 2,6-dimethylaniline, 3,5-dimethoxy Aniline, 3- (2-amino-4-methylphenoxy) propan-1-sulfonic acid, 3- (2-aminophenoxy) propan-1-sulfonic acid, 4- (2-amino-4-methylphenoxy) butane- 1-Sulfonic acid, 4- (2-aminophenoxy) butane-1-sulfonic acid, 2- (2-amino-4-methylphenoxy) ethane-1-sulfonic acid, 2- (2-aminophenoxy) ethane-1 -Sulfonic acid, 3- (3-amino-4-methylphenoxy) propan-1-sulfonic acid, 3- (3-aminophenoxy) propan-1-sulfonic acid, 4- (3-amino-4-methylphenoxy) Butane-1-sulfonic acid, 4- (3-aminophenoxy) butane-1-sulfonic acid, 2- (3-amino-4-methylphenoxy) ethane-1-sulfonic acid, 2- (3-aminophenoxy) ethane -1-Sulfonic acid, 3- (2-amino-4-methoxyphenoxy) propan-1-sulfonic acid, 4- (2-amino-4-methoxyphenoxy) butane-1-sulfonic acid, 2- (2-amino -4-methoxyphenoxy) ethane-1-sulfonic acid, 3- (3-amino-4-methoxyphenoxy) propan-1-sulfonic acid, 4- (3-amino-4-methoxyphenoxy) butane-1-sulfonic acid , 2- (3-Amino-4-methoxyphenoxy) ethane-1-sulfonic acid, 3- (2-amino-4-ethoxyphenoxy) propan-1-sulfonic acid, 4- (2-amino-4-ethoxyphenoxy) ) Butane-1-sulfonic acid, 2- (2-amino-4-ethoxyphenoxy) ethane-1-sulfonic acid, 3- (3-amino-4-ethoxyphenoxy) propan-1-sulfonic acid, 4- (3) -Amino-4 -Ethoxyphenoxy) butane-1-sulfonic acid, 2- (3-amino-4-ethoxyphenoxy) ethane-1-sulfonic acid and the like can be mentioned. The amino groups of these aromatic amines may be protected. Examples of the protecting group include an ω-methanesulfon group.
 酸クロライド(B)及び(G)としては、4-ニトロベンゾイルクロライド、3-メチル-4-ニトロベンゾイルクロライド、2-メチル-4-ニトロベンゾイルクロライド、3-エチル-4-ニトロベンゾイルクロライド、2-エチル-4-ニトロベンゾイルクロライド、3-プロピル-4-ニトロベンゾイルクロライド、2-プロピル-4-ニトロベンゾイルクロライド、3-ブチル-4-ニトロベンゾイルクロライド、2-ブチル-4-ニトロベンゾイルクロライド、3-メトキシ-4-ニトロベンゾイルクロライド、3-エトキシ-4-ニトロベンゾイルクロライド、3-プロポキシ-4-ニトロベンゾイルクロライド、3-ブトキシ-4-ニトロベンゾイルクロライド、2-メトキシ-4-ニトロベンゾイルクロライド、2-エトキシ-4-ニトロベンゾイルクロライド、2-プロポキシ-4-ニトロベンゾイルクロライド、2-ブトキシ-4-ニトロベンゾイルクロライド等が挙げられる。 As acid chlorides (B) and (G), 4-nitrobenzoyl chloride, 3-methyl-4-nitrobenzoyl chloride, 2-methyl-4-nitrobenzoyl chloride, 3-ethyl-4-nitrobenzoyl chloride, 2- Ethyl-4-nitrobenzoyl chloride, 3-propyl-4-nitrobenzoyl chloride, 2-propyl-4-nitrobenzoyl chloride, 3-butyl-4-nitrobenzoyl chloride, 2-butyl-4-nitrobenzoyl chloride, 3- Methoxy-4-nitrobenzoyl chloride, 3-ethoxy-4-nitrobenzoyl chloride, 3-propoxy-4-nitrobenzoyl chloride, 3-butoxy-4-nitrobenzoyl chloride, 2-methoxy-4-nitrobenzoyl chloride, 2- Examples thereof include ethoxy-4-nitrobenzoyl chloride, 2-propoxy-4-nitrobenzoyl chloride, 2-butoxy-4-nitrobenzoyl chloride and the like.
 上記偏光素子において、上記式(7)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩の含有量は、式(1)のアゾ化合物の含有量100質量部に対して、0.01~300質量部であることが好ましく、より好ましくは0.1~200質量部であり、30~200質量部であることがさらに好ましい。 In the polarizing element, the content of the azo compound represented by the above formula (7) or a salt thereof is 0.01 to 300 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the content of the azo compound of the formula (1). It is preferable, more preferably 0.1 to 200 parts by mass, and even more preferably 30 to 200 parts by mass.
 上記式(1)、式(2)、式(6)、または式(7)で表されるアゾ化合物は、それぞれ遊離形態であっても、塩の形態であってもよい。塩は、例えば、リチウム塩、ナトリウム塩、およびカリウム塩などのアルカリ金属塩、又は、アンモニウム塩やアルキルアミン塩などの有機塩であり得る。塩は、好ましくは、ナトリウム塩である。 The azo compound represented by the above formula (1), formula (2), formula (6), or formula (7) may be in the free form or in the salt form, respectively. The salt can be, for example, an alkali metal salt such as a lithium salt, a sodium salt, and a potassium salt, or an organic salt such as an ammonium salt or an alkylamine salt. The salt is preferably a sodium salt.
 上記偏光素子は、式(1)と式(2)とで表されるアゾ化合物を含み、任意で前記アゾ化合物以外の構造を有する有機染料1種以上をさらに含むことができる。例えば、式(6)、または式(7)で表されるアゾ化合物をさらに含ませることが可能である。上記偏光素子は、後述する好ましい範囲の色度であるa*値およびb*値、視感度補正後の単体透過率、および特定波長帯域における平均透過率等の性能を有することができる。例えば、偏光素子単体での各波長の透過率において、その透過率を一定に出来る。さらに、各波長の平行位においても透過率を一定に出来、すなわち偏光素子2枚の吸収軸を平行にした時の平行位の色相において無彩色を提供できる。さらに、直交位においても同時に各波長の透過率を一定にすることが出来、すなわち偏光素子2枚の吸収軸を直交にした時の直交位の色相において無彩色な色相を提供できる。このことから、本願の偏光素子が式(1)及び式(2)、並びに任意で他の構造の有機染料、例えば式(6)、または(7)で表されるアゾ化合物を含むことにより、高透過率で高コントラスト、即ち高偏光度な偏光素子を提供できるだけでなく、無彩色な色相も兼ね備えた偏光素子を提供できる。 The polarizing element contains an azo compound represented by the formulas (1) and (2), and can optionally further contain one or more organic dyes having a structure other than the azo compound. For example, it is possible to further include the azo compound represented by the formula (6) or the formula (7). The polarizing element can have performances such as a * value and b * value, which are chromaticities in a preferable range described later, a single transmittance after correction of luminosity factor, and an average transmittance in a specific wavelength band. For example, the transmittance of each wavelength of the polarizing element alone can be kept constant. Further, the transmittance can be made constant even in the parallel position of each wavelength, that is, an achromatic color can be provided in the hue of the parallel position when the absorption axes of the two polarizing elements are parallel. Further, the transmittance of each wavelength can be made constant at the same time even in the orthogonal position, that is, it is possible to provide an achromatic hue in the hue of the orthogonal position when the absorption axes of the two polarizing elements are orthogonal. From this, the polarizing element of the present application contains the formulas (1) and (2), and optionally an organic dye having another structure, for example, an azo compound represented by the formula (6) or (7). Not only can a polarizing element having high transmittance and high contrast, that is, a high degree of polarization can be provided, but also a polarizing element having an achromatic hue can be provided.
 上記偏光素子における上記アゾ化合物の配合比は、上述した各アゾ化合物の含有量において、透過率および色度が後述する好ましい範囲になるようにさらに調整されていることが好適である。偏光素子の性能は、偏光素子における各アゾ化合物の配合比のみならず、アゾ化合物を吸着させる基材の膨潤度や延伸倍率、染色時間、染色温度、染色時のpH、塩の影響等の様々な要因により変化する。このため、各アゾ化合物の配合比は、基材の膨潤度、染色時の温度、時間、pH、塩の種類、塩の濃度、さらには延伸倍率に応じて決定することができる。 It is preferable that the compounding ratio of the azo compound in the polarizing element is further adjusted so that the transmittance and the chromaticity are in the preferable ranges described later in the content of each of the azo compounds described above. The performance of the polarizing element includes not only the compounding ratio of each azo compound in the polarizing element, but also various factors such as the degree of swelling and stretching ratio of the base material that adsorbs the azo compound, the dyeing time, the dyeing temperature, the pH at the time of dyeing, and the influence of salts. It changes depending on various factors. Therefore, the blending ratio of each azo compound can be determined according to the degree of swelling of the base material, the temperature at the time of dyeing, the time, the pH, the type of salt, the concentration of salt, and the stretching ratio.
(視感度補正後の透過率)
 上記視感度補正後の透過率は、JIS Z 8722:2009に従って求められる、人間の目の視感度に補正された透過率である。補正するために用いる各波長の透過率の測定は、測定試料(例えば、偏光素子又は偏光板)について、C光源(2度視野)を用いて400~700nmの各波長について、5nm又は10nmごとに分光透過率を測定し、JIS Z 8722:2009に従って視感度に補正することで求めることができる。視感度補正後の透過率は、偏光素子、または偏光板を単体で測定した場合の視感度補正後の単体透過率、偏光素子、または偏光板を2枚用いて各々の吸収軸を平行にした時の透過率を視感度に補正した場合の視感度補正後の平行位透過率、偏光素子、または偏光板を2枚用いて各々の吸収軸を直交にした時の透過率を視感度に補正した場合の視感度補正後の直交位透過率がある。
(Transmittance after luminosity factor correction)
The transmittance after the luminosity factor correction is a transmittance corrected to the luminosity factor of the human eye, which is obtained according to JIS Z 8722: 2009. The transmittance of each wavelength used for correction is measured every 5 nm or 10 nm for each wavelength of 400 to 700 nm using a C light source (2 degree field) for a measurement sample (for example, a polarizing element or a polarizing plate). It can be obtained by measuring the spectral transmittance and correcting the visual sensitivity according to JIS Z 8722: 2009. As for the transmittance after the visual sensitivity correction, the single transmittance after the visual sensitivity correction when the polarizing element or the polarizing plate was measured by itself, the polarizing element, or two polarizing plates were used, and each absorption axis was made parallel. When the transmittance at time is corrected to visual sensitivity, the parallel position transmittance after correction of visual sensitivity, and the transmittance when each absorption axis is orthogonalized using two polarizing elements or polarizing plates are corrected to visual sensitivity. There is orthogonal transmittance after correction of visual sensitivity.
(H-1)2つの波長帯域の平均透過率の差
 上記偏光素子は、特定の波長帯域間の平均透過率の差が所定の値以下であることが好ましい。平均透過率は、特定の波長帯域における各波長の透過率の平均値である。
(H-1) Difference in Average Transmittance between Two Wavelength Bands The polarization element preferably has a difference in average transmittance between specific wavelength bands of a predetermined value or less. The average transmittance is the average value of the transmittance of each wavelength in a specific wavelength band.
 波長帯域420nm~480nm、520nm~590nm、および600nm~640nmは、JIS Z 8781-4:2013において色を示す際に計算で用いる等色関数に基づく主な波長帯域である。具体的には、JIS Z 8781-4:2013の元になるJIS Z 8701のXYZ等色関数において、600nmを最大値とするx(λ)、550nmを最大値とするy(λ)、455nmを最大値とするz(λ)のそれぞれの最大値を100としたとき、20以上となる値を示すそれぞれの波長が、420nm~480nm、520nm~590nm、および600nm~640nmの各波長帯域である。 Wavelength bands 420 nm to 480 nm, 520 nm to 590 nm, and 600 nm to 640 nm are the main wavelength bands based on the color matching function used in the calculation when showing colors in JIS Z 8781-4: 2013. Specifically, in the XYZ color matching function of JIS Z 8701, which is the basis of JIS Z 8781-4: 2013, x (λ) having a maximum value of 600 nm and y (λ) having a maximum value of 550 nm are set to 455 nm. When the maximum value of z (λ), which is the maximum value, is set to 100, each wavelength showing a value of 20 or more is each wavelength band of 420 nm to 480 nm, 520 nm to 590 nm, and 600 nm to 640 nm.
 偏光素子2枚を吸収軸方向が平行になるように重ねて配置した状態(明表示時、又は、白表示時)について各波長で測定して得られる透過率を、各波長の「平行位透過率」とも称する。また、○nmから△nmの各波長の平均透過率を「AT○-△」とも称する。本発明の偏光素子の各波長の平行位透過率について、AT420-480とAT520-590との差が絶対値として2.5%以下であることが好ましく、より好ましくは1.8%以下、さらに好ましくは1.5%以下、特に好ましくは1.0%以下である。さらに、各波長の平行位透過率について、AT520-590とAT600-640との差が絶対値として3.0%以下であることが好ましく、より好ましくは2.0%以下、さらに好ましくは1.5%以下、特に好ましくは1.0%以下である。このような偏光素子は、平行位で高品位な紙のような白色を表示することができる。 The transmittance obtained by measuring each wavelength in a state where two polarizing elements are stacked so as to be parallel to each other in the absorption axis direction (in bright display or white display) is measured in "parallel transmission" of each wavelength. Also called "rate". Further, the average transmittance of each wavelength from ○ nm to Δnm is also referred to as “AT ○ − △ ”. Regarding the parallel transmittance of each wavelength of the polarizing element of the present invention, the difference between AT 420-480 and AT 520-590 is preferably 2.5% or less, more preferably 1.8% or less as an absolute value. , More preferably 1.5% or less, and particularly preferably 1.0% or less. Further, regarding the parallel transmittance of each wavelength, the difference between AT 520-590 and AT 600-640 is preferably 3.0% or less as an absolute value, more preferably 2.0% or less, still more preferably. It is 1.5% or less, particularly preferably 1.0% or less. Such a polarizing element can display a high-quality paper-like white color in a parallel position.
 偏光素子2枚を吸収軸方向が直交になるように重ねて配置した状態(黒表示時、又は、暗表示時)について各波長で測定して得られる透過率を、各波長の「直交位透過率」とも称する。本発明の偏光素子の各波長の直交位透過率について、AT420-480とAT520-590との差が絶対値として1.0%以下であり、かつ、AT520-590とAT600-640との差が絶対値として1.0%以下であることが好ましい。このような偏光素子は、直交位で無彩色な黒色を表示することができる。さらに、各波長の直交位透過率について、AT420-480とAT520-590との差が絶対値として、好ましくは0.6%以下、より好ましくは0.3%以下、さらに好ましくは0.1%以下である。直交位透過率について、AT520-590とAT600-640との差が絶対値として、好ましくは1.0%以下、より好ましくは0.6%以下、さらに好ましくは0.3%以下、特に好ましくは0.1%である。 The transmittance obtained by measuring each wavelength in a state where two polarizing elements are stacked so that the absorption axis directions are orthogonal to each other (when displayed in black or when displayed in dark) is the "orthogonal transmission" of each wavelength. Also called "rate". Regarding the orthogonal position transmittance of each wavelength of the polarizing element of the present invention, the difference between AT 420-480 and AT 520-590 is 1.0% or less as an absolute value, and AT 520-590 and AT 600-640. The difference from is preferably 1.0% or less as an absolute value. Such a polarizing element can display an achromatic black color at an orthogonal position. Further, regarding the orthogonal position transmittance of each wavelength, the difference between AT 420-480 and AT 520-590 as an absolute value is preferably 0.6% or less, more preferably 0.3% or less, still more preferably 0. It is 1% or less. Regarding the orthogonal position transmittance, the difference between AT 520-590 and AT 600-640 as an absolute value is preferably 1.0% or less, more preferably 0.6% or less, still more preferably 0.3% or less, particularly. It is preferably 0.1%.
 さらに、波長帯域380nm~420nm、480nm~520nm、および640nm~780nmの各波長における単体透過率、平行位透過率、および直交位透過率のそれぞれの平均透過率は、上記波長帯域420nm~480nm、520nm~590nm、600nm~640nmにおける平均透過率が上述したように調整されている場合には、偏光素子の色相への影響は大きくないものの、ある程度調整されていることが好ましい。各波長の単体透過率について、AT380-420とAT420-480との差が15%以下であることが好ましく、AT480-520とAT420-480との差が15%以下、AT480-520とAT520-590と差が15%以下、AT640-780とAT600-640との差が20%以下であることが好ましい。 Further, the average transmittances of the single transmittance, the parallel position transmittance, and the orthogonal position transmittance at each wavelength of the wavelength bands of 380 nm to 420 nm, 480 nm to 520 nm, and 640 nm to 780 nm are the above wavelength bands of 420 nm to 480 nm and 520 nm. When the average transmittance at ~ 590 nm and 600 nm to 640 nm is adjusted as described above, it is preferable that the average transmittance is adjusted to some extent, although the influence on the hue of the polarizing element is not large. For single transmittance of each wavelength, AT is preferable that the difference is not more than 15% of the 380-420 and AT 420-480, AT 480-520 a difference between the AT 420-480 15% or less, AT 480- It is preferable that the difference between 520 and AT 520-590 is 15% or less, and the difference between AT 640-780 and AT 600-640 is 20% or less.
(H-2)視感度補正後の単体透過率の値
 上記偏光素子は、視感度補正後の単体透過率が35%~66%であることが好ましい。視感度補正後の単体透過率は、測定試料(例えば、偏光素子又は偏光板)1枚について、JIS Z 8722:2009に従って視感度に補正した透過率である。偏光板の性能としては、透過率がより高いものが求められるが、視感度補正後の単体透過率が35%~60%であれば表示装置に用いても、違和感なく明るさを表現できる。透過率が高いほど偏光度は下がる傾向にあるため、偏光度とのバランスの観点からは、視感度補正後の単体透過率は、37%~50%であることがより好ましく、さらに好ましくは35%~45%である。視感度補正後の単体透過率が65%を超えると偏光度が低下する場合があるが、偏光素子の明るい透過率、又は、特定の偏光性能やコントラストを求める場合には、視感度補正後の単体透過率が65%を超えてもよい。
(H-2) Value of Single Transmittance After Luminosity Factor Correction The polarizing element preferably has a single transmittance of 35% to 66% after the luminosity factor correction. The single transmittance after the luminosity factor correction is the transmittance of one measurement sample (for example, a polarizing element or a polarizing plate) corrected to the luminosity factor according to JIS Z 8722: 2009. The performance of the polarizing plate is required to have a higher transmittance, but if the single transmittance after correction of the luminosity factor is 35% to 60%, the brightness can be expressed without discomfort even when used in a display device. Since the degree of polarization tends to decrease as the transmittance increases, the single transmittance after correction of luminosity factor is more preferably 37% to 50%, and even more preferably 35, from the viewpoint of the balance with the degree of polarization. % To 45%. If the single transmittance after luminosity factor correction exceeds 65%, the degree of polarization may decrease. However, when the bright transmittance of the polarizing element or a specific polarization performance or contrast is required, the luminosity factor is corrected. The single transmittance may exceed 65%.
(H-3)特定波長帯域における平均透過率
 偏光素子は、平行位で測定されたAT520-590が25%~50%であることが良い。このような偏光素子は、表示装置に設けた際に、明るく、輝度の高い明瞭な表示装置とすることができる。520nm~590nmの波長帯域の透過率は、JIS Z 8781-4:2013において色を示す際に計算で用いる等色関数に基づく主な波長帯域の1つである。特に、520nm~590nmの各波長帯域は、等色関数に基づく最も視感度の高い波長帯域であり、この範囲における透過率が、目視で確認できる透過率と近い。このため、520nm~590nmの波長帯域の透過率を調整することが非常に重要である。平行位で測定されたAT520-590は、より好ましくは28%~45%であり、さらに好ましくは30%~40%である。さらに、このときの偏光素子の偏光度は、80%~100%であることで良いが、好ましくは90%~100%、より好ましくは97%~100%であり、さらに好ましくは99%以上であり、特に好ましくは99.5%以上である。偏光度は、高い方が好ましいが、偏光度と透過率との関係において、明るさを重視するか、偏光度(又はコントラスト)を重視するかにより、適した透過率および偏光度に調整することができる。
(H-3) Average transmittance in a specific wavelength band As the polarizing element, AT 520-590 measured in a parallel position is preferably 25% to 50%. When such a polarizing element is provided in a display device, it can be a clear display device that is bright and has high brightness. The transmittance of the wavelength band of 520 nm to 590 nm is one of the main wavelength bands based on the color matching function used in the calculation when showing a color in JIS Z 8781-4: 2013. In particular, each wavelength band from 520 nm to 590 nm is the wavelength band having the highest luminosity factor based on the color matching function, and the transmittance in this range is close to the transmittance that can be visually confirmed. Therefore, it is very important to adjust the transmittance in the wavelength band of 520 nm to 590 nm. AT 520-590 measured in the parallel position is more preferably 28% to 45%, still more preferably 30% to 40%. Further, the degree of polarization of the polarizing element at this time may be 80% to 100%, preferably 90% to 100%, more preferably 97% to 100%, and further preferably 99% or more. Yes, particularly preferably 99.5% or more. It is preferable that the degree of polarization is high, but in the relationship between the degree of polarization and the degree of transmittance, it is necessary to adjust the degree of polarization to an appropriate degree depending on whether the degree of brightness or the degree of polarization (or contrast) is emphasized. Can be done.
(色度a*値およびb*値)
 色度a*値およびb*値は、JIS Z 8781-4:2013により、自然光の透過率測定時に求められる値である。JIS Z 8781-4:2013に定められる物体色の表示方法は、国際照明委員会(略称:CIE)が定める物体色の表示方法に相当する。色度a*値およびb*値の測定は、測定試料(例えば、偏光素子又は偏光板)に自然光を照射して行われる。なお、以下において、測定試料1枚について求められる色度a*値およびb*値はa*-sおよびb*-s、測定試料2枚をその吸収軸方向が互いに平行となるように配置した状態(白表示時)について求められる色度a*値およびb*値はa*-pおよびb*-p、測定試料2枚をその吸収軸方向が互いに直交するように配置した状態(黒表示時)について求められる色度a*値およびb*値はa*-cおよびb*-cと示す。
(Saturation a * value and b * value)
The chromaticity a * value and b * value are values obtained at the time of measuring the transmittance of natural light according to JIS Z 8781-4: 2013. The object color display method specified in JIS Z 8781-4: 2013 corresponds to the object color display method specified by the International Commission on Illumination (abbreviation: CIE). The measurement of the chromaticity a * value and the b * value is performed by irradiating the measurement sample (for example, a polarizing element or a polarizing plate) with natural light. In the following, the chromaticity a * value and b * value required for one measurement sample are a * -s and b * -s, and the two measurement samples are arranged so that their absorption axis directions are parallel to each other. The chromaticity a * value and b * value required for the state (when displayed in white) are a * -p and b * -p, and the two measurement samples are arranged so that their absorption axis directions are orthogonal to each other (black display). The chromaticity a * value and b * value obtained for hour) are shown as a * -c and b * -c.
 上記偏光素子は、a*-sおよびb*-sの絶対値の各々が1.0以下であることが好ましく、a*-pおよびb*-pの絶対値の各々が2.0以下であることが好ましい。このような偏光素子は、単体で中性色であり、白表示時に高品位な白色を表示することができる。偏光素子のa*-pおよびb*-pの絶対値は、より好ましくは1.5以下であり、さらに好ましくは1.0以下である。さらに、偏光素子は、a*-cおよびb*-cの絶対値の各々が2.0以下であることが好ましく、1.0以下であることがより好ましい。このような偏光素子は、黒表示時に無彩色の黒色を表示することができる。色度a*値およびb*値の絶対値に0.5の差があるだけでも人間は色の違いを知覚でき、人によっては色の違いを大きく感じることがある。このため、偏光素子において、これらの値を制御することは非常に重要である。特に、a*-p、b*-p、a*-c、およびb*-cの絶対値の値が、各々、1.0以下である場合には、白表示時の白色および黒表示時の黒色にその他の色がほぼ確認できない、良好な偏光板が得られる。平行位で無彩色性、すなわち高品位な紙のような白色を実現し、かつ、直交位で無彩色な高級感ある明瞭な黒色を実現することができる。ただし、表示装置の黒色を与える色相の影響はその限りでなく、そもそも光が無い(暗い)状態では、色相を有していても黒く見える。そのため、偏光度が高い場合、つまり直交位透過率が低い場合には偏光素子は、a*-cおよびb*-cの絶対値の各々2.0以下でなくとも黒を与えることが出来る。我々の検討の結果、波長帯域420nm~480nm、520nm~590nm、および600nm~640nmの各波長における直交位透過率が1%以下又は偏光度は約97%以上の時、a*-cおよびb*-cの絶対値に関わらず視感的に黒を与えることが出来るため好ましいことを見出した。波長帯域420nm~480nm、520nm~590nm、および600nm~640nmの各波長における直交位透過率が0.6%以下又は偏光度98%以上の時により黒を視感的に与えることが出来るためより好ましく、各波長の直交位透過率が0.3%以下又は偏光度99%以上の時に特に好ましい。 In the above-mentioned polarizing element, each of the absolute values of a * -s and b * -s is preferably 1.0 or less, and each of the absolute values of a * -p and b * -p is 2.0 or less. It is preferable to have. Such a polarizing element is a neutral color by itself, and can display high-quality white when displaying white. The absolute values of a * -p and b * -p of the polarizing element are more preferably 1.5 or less, still more preferably 1.0 or less. Further, in the polarizing element, each of the absolute values of a * -c and b * -c is preferably 2.0 or less, and more preferably 1.0 or less. Such a polarizing element can display achromatic black when displaying black. Even if there is a difference of 0.5 between the absolute values of the chromaticity a * value and the b * value, humans can perceive the difference in color, and some people may feel the difference in color greatly. Therefore, it is very important to control these values in the polarizing element. In particular, when the absolute values of a * -p, b * -p, a * -c, and b * -c are 1.0 or less, respectively, when white and black are displayed. A good polarizing plate can be obtained in which other colors can hardly be confirmed in black. It is possible to realize achromaticity in the parallel position, that is, a high-quality paper-like white color, and to realize a high-quality clear black color that is achromatic in the orthogonal position. However, the influence of the hue giving the black color of the display device is not limited to this, and in the absence of light (dark), the display device looks black even if it has a hue. Therefore, when the degree of polarization is high, that is, when the orthogonal position transmittance is low, the polarizing element can give black even if the absolute values of a * -c and b * -c are not 2.0 or less, respectively. As a result of our examination, a * -c and b * when the orthogonal position transmittance at each wavelength of the wavelength band 420 nm to 480 nm, 520 nm to 590 nm, and 600 nm to 640 nm is 1% or less or the degree of polarization is about 97% or more. It was found that it is preferable because black can be visually given regardless of the absolute value of −c. It is more preferable because black can be visually provided when the orthogonal position transmittance at each wavelength of the wavelength band 420 nm to 480 nm, 520 nm to 590 nm, and 600 nm to 640 nm is 0.6% or less or the degree of polarization is 98% or more. It is particularly preferable when the orthogonal position transmittance of each wavelength is 0.3% or less or the degree of polarization is 99% or more.
 以上のことから、偏光素子2枚を吸収軸方向が直交になるように重ねて配置した時、その色相が黒を与えることが出来るための好ましい方法は、以下の1)~3)のいずれかを満たすことで達成する。
1)偏光素子2枚を吸収軸方向が直交になるように重ねて配置した状態(黒表示時、又は、暗表示時)について測定して得られる各波長の透過率(以下、各波長の「直交位透過率」とも称する。)について、AT420-480とAT520-590との差が絶対値として、1.0%以下であり、かつ、AT520-590とAT600-640との差が絶対値として1.0%以下
2)a*-cおよびb*-cの絶対値の各々が2.0以下である
3)波長帯域420nm~480nm、520nm~590nm、および600nm~640nmの各波長における直交位透過率が1%以下又は偏光度が約97%以上。
From the above, when two polarizing elements are stacked so as to be orthogonal to each other in the absorption axis direction, a preferable method for imparting black hue is any one of the following 1) to 3). Achieve by satisfying.
1) The transmittance of each wavelength obtained by measuring the state in which two polarizing elements are stacked so as to be orthogonal to each other (in black display or in dark display) (hereinafter, "" of each wavelength ". also referred to as the perpendicular position transmittance "for.), as the difference between the absolute value of the aT 420-480 and aT 520-590, not more than 1.0%, and the difference between the aT 520-590 and aT 600-640 Is 1.0% or less as an absolute value 2) Each of the absolute values of a * -c and b * -c is 2.0 or less 3) Wavelength band 420 nm to 480 nm, 520 nm to 590 nm, and 600 nm to 640 nm, respectively. Orthogonal transmittance at wavelength is 1% or less or polarization degree is about 97% or more.
 本発明に係る偏光素子は、高コントラストおよび高透過率を有しながら、単体での無彩色性と高偏光度を有する。一態様において、さらに、本発明の偏光素子は、白表示時に高品位な紙のような白色(ペーパーホワイト)を表現することができ、黒表示時に無彩色な黒色、特に高級感ある明瞭な黒色を表現することができる。これまでは、このような高透過率と無彩色性を兼ね備えた偏光素子は存在していなかった。本発明の偏光素子は、さらに、高耐久性であり、特に高温および高湿度に対する耐久性を有する。 The polarizing element according to the present invention has high contrast and high transmittance, while having achromaticity and high degree of polarization by itself. In one aspect, the polarizing element of the present invention can further express high-quality paper-like white (paper white) when displayed in white, and achromatic black when displayed in black, particularly high-quality clear black. Can be expressed. Until now, there has been no polarizing element having such high transmittance and achromaticity. The polarizing element of the present invention is also highly durable, particularly resistant to high temperatures and high humidity.
 又、本発明に係る偏光素子は、700nm以上の波長の光の吸収が一般的に用いられるヨウ素系偏光板や特許文献3に比べて少ないため、太陽光などの光を照射しても発熱が少ないという利点がある。例えば、屋外等で液晶ディスプレイを使用する場合には、太陽光が液晶ディスプレイに照射され、その結果、偏光素子にも照射される。太陽光は、700nm以上の波長の光も有し、発熱効果を有する近赤外線を含む。例えば、特公平02-061988号公報の実施例3に記載されるようなアゾ化合物を用いた偏光素子は波長700nm付近の近赤外の光を吸収するために、若干発熱するが、本発明の偏光素子は、近赤外線の吸収が極めて少ないため、屋外で太陽光に暴露されても発熱が少ない。本発明の偏光素子は、発熱が少ないことにより、劣化も少ない点で優れている。 Further, since the polarizing element according to the present invention absorbs less light having a wavelength of 700 nm or more as compared with an iodine-based polarizing plate and Patent Document 3 which are generally used, heat is generated even when irradiated with light such as sunlight. It has the advantage of being less. For example, when the liquid crystal display is used outdoors, sunlight is applied to the liquid crystal display, and as a result, the polarizing element is also irradiated. Sunlight also has light having a wavelength of 700 nm or more, and includes near infrared rays having a heat generating effect. For example, a polarizing element using an azo compound as described in Example 3 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 02-061988 generates a little heat because it absorbs near-infrared light having a wavelength of around 700 nm. Since the polarizing element absorbs very little near infrared rays, it generates less heat even when exposed to sunlight outdoors. The polarizing element of the present invention is excellent in that it generates less heat and therefore causes less deterioration.
<偏光素子の作製方法>
 以下、ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂製の基材にアゾ化合物を吸着させて作製する場合を例に、具体的な偏光素子の作製方法を説明する。なお、本発明に係る偏光素子の製造方法は、以下の製法に限定されるものではない。
<Manufacturing method of polarizing element>
Hereinafter, a specific method for producing a polarizing element will be described by taking as an example a case where an azo compound is adsorbed on a base material made of a polyvinyl alcohol-based resin. The method for manufacturing a polarizing element according to the present invention is not limited to the following manufacturing method.
(原反フィルムの準備)
 原反フィルムは、ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂を製膜することにより作製することができる。ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂は、特に限定されず、市販のものを用いてもよいし、公知の方法で合成されたものを用いてもよい。ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂は、例えば、ポリ酢酸ビニル系樹脂をケン化することにより得ることができる。ポリ酢酸ビニル系樹脂としては、酢酸ビニルの単独重合体であるポリ酢酸ビニルのほか、酢酸ビニルおよびこれと共重合可能な他の単量体の共重合体などが例示される。酢酸ビニルに共重合する他の単量体としては、例えば、不飽和カルボン酸類、オレフィン類、ビニルエーテル類、および不飽和スルホン酸類等が挙げられる。ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂のケン化度は、通常85~100モル%程度であることが好ましく、より好ましくは95モル%以上である。ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂は、さらに変性されていてもよく、例えば、アルデヒド類で変性したポリビニルホルマールやポリビニルアセタールなども使用できる。又、ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂の重合度は、粘度平均重合度を意味し、当該技術分野において周知の手法によって求めることができ、通常1,000~10,000程度が好ましく、より好ましくは重合度1,500~6,000程度である。
(Preparation of original film)
The raw film can be produced by forming a polyvinyl alcohol-based resin. The polyvinyl alcohol-based resin is not particularly limited, and a commercially available resin may be used, or a resin synthesized by a known method may be used. The polyvinyl alcohol-based resin can be obtained, for example, by saponifying a polyvinyl acetate-based resin. Examples of the polyvinyl acetate-based resin include polyvinyl acetate, which is a homopolymer of vinyl acetate, and copolymers of vinyl acetate and other monomers copolymerizable therewith. Examples of other monomers copolymerized with vinyl acetate include unsaturated carboxylic acids, olefins, vinyl ethers, unsaturated sulfonic acids and the like. The degree of saponification of the polyvinyl alcohol-based resin is usually preferably about 85 to 100 mol%, more preferably 95 mol% or more. The polyvinyl alcohol-based resin may be further modified, and for example, polyvinyl formal or polyvinyl acetal modified with aldehydes can also be used. The degree of polymerization of the polyvinyl alcohol-based resin means the viscosity average degree of polymerization, which can be determined by a method well known in the art, and is usually preferably about 1,000 to 10,000, more preferably the degree of polymerization 1. , 500 to 6,000.
 上記ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂を製膜する方法は特に限定されるものでなく、公知の方法で製膜することができる。この場合、ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂フィルムには、可塑剤としてグリセリン、エチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール、低分子量ポリエチレングリコールなどが含有されていてもよい。可塑剤の量はフィルム全量中に好ましくは5~20質量%であり、より好ましくは8~15質量%である。原反フィルムの膜厚は特に限定されないが、例えば、5μm~150μm程度、好ましくは10μm~100μm程度である。 The method for forming the film of the above-mentioned polyvinyl alcohol-based resin is not particularly limited, and the film can be formed by a known method. In this case, the polyvinyl alcohol-based resin film may contain glycerin, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, low molecular weight polyethylene glycol, or the like as a plasticizer. The amount of the plasticizer is preferably 5 to 20% by mass, more preferably 8 to 15% by mass in the total amount of the film. The film thickness of the raw film is not particularly limited, but is, for example, about 5 μm to 150 μm, preferably about 10 μm to 100 μm.
(膨潤工程)
 以上により得られた原反フィルムに、膨潤処理を施す。膨潤処理は20~50℃の膨潤液に、原反フィルムを30秒から10分間浸漬させることにより行うことが好ましい。膨潤液は水が好ましい。延伸倍率は、1.00~1.50倍に調整することが好ましく、1.10~1.35倍に調整することがより好ましい。偏光素子を製造する時間を短縮する場合には、後述する染色処理時にも原反フィルムが膨潤するため膨潤処理を省略することもできる。
(Swelling process)
The raw film obtained as described above is subjected to a swelling treatment. The swelling treatment is preferably carried out by immersing the raw film in a swelling solution at 20 to 50 ° C. for 30 seconds to 10 minutes. Water is preferable as the swelling liquid. The draw ratio is preferably adjusted to 1.00 to 1.50 times, more preferably 1.10 to 1.35 times. When the time for manufacturing the polarizing element is shortened, the swelling treatment can be omitted because the raw film swells even during the dyeing treatment described later.
(染色工程)
 染色工程では、原反フィルムを膨潤処理して得られた樹脂フィルムにアゾ化合物を吸着および含浸させる。膨潤工程を省略した場合には、染色工程において原反フィルムの膨潤処理を同時に行うことができる。アゾ化合物を吸着および含浸させる処理は、樹脂フィルムに着色する工程であるため、染色工程としている。
(Dyeing process)
In the dyeing step, the resin film obtained by swelling the raw film is adsorbed and impregnated with the azo compound. When the swelling step is omitted, the swelling treatment of the raw film can be performed at the same time in the dyeing step. Since the process of adsorbing and impregnating the azo compound is a step of coloring the resin film, it is a dyeing step.
 染色工程において用いるアゾ化合物としては、式(1)および式(2)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩の混合物を用いる。任意に式(6)、または式(7)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩をさらに用いることができる。さらに任意に非特許文献1などで例示される二色性染料であるアゾ化合物を、本願の偏光素子の性能が損なわれない程度に用いて色を調整してもよい。これらのアゾ化合物は遊離酸の形態で用いるほか、当該化合物の塩を用いてもよい。そのような塩は、例えばリチウム塩、ナトリウム塩、およびカリウム塩などのアルカリ金属塩、又は、アンモニウム塩やアルキルアミン塩などの有機塩であり、好ましくは、ナトリウム塩である。 As the azo compound used in the dyeing step, a mixture of the azo compound represented by the formulas (1) and (2) or a salt thereof is used. Arbitrarily, an azo compound represented by the formula (6) or the formula (7) or a salt thereof can be further used. Further, the color may be optionally adjusted by using an azo compound which is a dichroic dye exemplified in Non-Patent Document 1 and the like to the extent that the performance of the polarizing element of the present application is not impaired. In addition to using these azo compounds in the form of free acids, salts of the compounds may be used. Such salts are alkali metal salts such as, for example, lithium salts, sodium salts, and potassium salts, or organic salts such as ammonium salts and alkylamine salts, preferably sodium salts.
 染色工程は、色素を樹脂フィルムに吸着および含浸させる方法であれば特に限定されないが、例えば、樹脂フィルムを染色溶液に浸漬させることにより行うことが好ましく、樹脂フィルムに染色溶液を塗布することによって行うこともできる。染色溶液中の各アゾ化合物は、例えば、0.001~10質量%の範囲内で調整することができる。 The dyeing step is not particularly limited as long as it is a method of adsorbing and impregnating the dye on the resin film, but is preferably performed by immersing the resin film in the dyeing solution, and is performed by applying the dyeing solution to the resin film. You can also do it. Each azo compound in the dyeing solution can be adjusted, for example, in the range of 0.001 to 10% by mass.
 この工程での溶液温度は、5~60℃が好ましく、20~50℃がより好ましく、35~50℃が特に好ましい。溶液に浸漬する時間は適度に調節できるが、30秒から20分で調節するのが好ましく、1~10分がより好ましい。 The solution temperature in this step is preferably 5 to 60 ° C, more preferably 20 to 50 ° C, and particularly preferably 35 to 50 ° C. The time of immersion in the solution can be adjusted appropriately, but it is preferably adjusted to 30 seconds to 20 minutes, more preferably 1 to 10 minutes.
 染色溶液は、アゾ化合物に加え、染色助剤を必要に応じてさらに含んでいてもよい。染色助剤としては、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸水素ナトリウム、塩化ナトリウム、硫酸ナトリウム、無水硫酸ナトリウム、およびトリポリリン酸ナトリウム等が挙げられる。染色助剤の含有量は、染料の染色性による時間および温度によって任意の濃度で調整できるが、それぞれの含有量としては、染色溶液中に0.01~5質量%が好ましく、0.1~2質量%がより好ましい。 The dyeing solution may further contain a dyeing aid, if necessary, in addition to the azo compound. Examples of the dyeing aid include sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogencarbonate, sodium chloride, sodium sulfate, anhydrous sodium sulfate, sodium tripolyphosphate and the like. The content of the dyeing aid can be adjusted at an arbitrary concentration depending on the time and temperature depending on the dyeability of the dye, and the content of each is preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass, preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass in the dyeing solution. 2% by mass is more preferable.
(洗浄工程1)
 染色工程後、次の工程に入る前に洗浄工程(以下、「洗浄工程1」とも称する。)を行うことができる。染浄工程1は、染色工程で樹脂フィルムの表面に付着した染色溶液を洗浄する工程である。洗浄工程1を行うことによって、次に処理する液中に染料が移行するのを抑制することができる。洗浄工程1では、洗浄液として一般的には水が用いられる。洗浄方法は、洗浄液に浸漬することが好ましいが、洗浄液を樹脂フィルムに塗布することによって洗浄することもできる。洗浄の時間は、特に限定されないが、好ましくは1~300秒、より好ましくは1~60秒である。洗浄工程1での洗浄液の温度は、樹脂フィルムを構成する材料(例えば、親水性高分子、ここではポリビニルアルコール系樹脂)が溶解しない温度であることが必要となる。一般的には5~40℃で洗浄処理される。ただし、洗浄工程1の工程がなくとも、性能には問題は出ないため、洗浄工程は省略することもできる。
(Washing step 1)
After the dyeing step, a washing step (hereinafter, also referred to as "cleaning step 1") can be performed before entering the next step. The dyeing and cleaning step 1 is a step of cleaning the dyeing solution adhering to the surface of the resin film in the dyeing step. By performing the washing step 1, it is possible to suppress the transfer of the dye into the liquid to be treated next. In the cleaning step 1, water is generally used as the cleaning liquid. The cleaning method is preferably immersed in a cleaning liquid, but cleaning can also be performed by applying the cleaning liquid to a resin film. The washing time is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 300 seconds, more preferably 1 to 60 seconds. The temperature of the cleaning liquid in the cleaning step 1 needs to be a temperature at which the material constituting the resin film (for example, a hydrophilic polymer, here, a polyvinyl alcohol-based resin) does not dissolve. Generally, it is washed at 5 to 40 ° C. However, even if the cleaning step 1 is not performed, there is no problem in performance, so that the cleaning step can be omitted.
(架橋剤および/又は耐水化剤を含有させる工程)
 染色工程又は洗浄工程1の後、架橋剤および/又は耐水化剤を含有させる工程を行うことができる。樹脂フィルムに架橋剤および/又は耐水化剤を含有させる方法は、処理溶液に浸漬することが好ましいが、処理溶液を樹脂フィルムに塗布又は塗工してもよい。処理溶液は、架橋剤および/又は耐水化剤を少なくとも1種と、溶媒とを含む。この工程での処理溶液の温度は、5~70℃が好ましく、5~50℃がより好ましい。この工程での処理時間は30秒~6分が好ましく、1~5分がより好ましい。
(Step of adding a cross-linking agent and / or a water resistant agent)
After the dyeing step or the washing step 1, a step of adding a cross-linking agent and / or a water resistant agent can be performed. The method of impregnating the resin film with a cross-linking agent and / or a water resistant agent is preferably to immerse the resin film in the treatment solution, but the treatment solution may be applied or coated on the resin film. The treatment solution contains at least one cross-linking agent and / or water resistant agent and a solvent. The temperature of the treatment solution in this step is preferably 5 to 70 ° C, more preferably 5 to 50 ° C. The treatment time in this step is preferably 30 seconds to 6 minutes, more preferably 1 to 5 minutes.
 架橋剤としては、例えば、ホウ酸、ホウ砂又はホウ酸アンモニウムなどのホウ素化合物、グリオキザール又はグルタルアルデヒド等の多価アルデヒド、ビウレット型、イソシアヌレート型又はブロック型等の多価イソシアネート系化合物、チタニウムオキシサルフェイト等のチタニウム系化合物等を用いることができるが、他にもエチレングリコールグリシジルエーテル、ポリアミドエピクロルヒドリン等を用いることができる。耐水化剤としては、過酸化コハク酸、過硫酸アンモニウム、過塩素酸カルシウム、ベンゾインエチルエーテル、エチレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル、グリセリンジグリシジルエーテル、塩化アンモニウム又は塩化マグネシウム等が挙げられるが、好ましくはホウ酸が用いられる。架橋剤および/又は耐水化剤のための溶媒としては、水が好ましいが限定されるものではない。架橋剤および/又は耐水化剤の含有濃度は、その種類に応じて当業者が適宜決定することができるが、ホウ酸を例にして示すと処理溶液中に濃度0.1~6.0質量%が好ましく、1.0~4.0質量%がより好ましい。ただし、架橋剤および/又は耐水化剤を含有させることが必須でなく、時間を短縮したい場合には、架橋処理又は耐水化処理が不必要な場合には、この処理工程を省略してもよい。 Examples of the cross-linking agent include a boron compound such as boric acid, borax or ammonium borate, a polyvalent aldehyde such as glioxal or glutaaldehyde, a polyvalent isocyanate compound such as biuret type, isocyanurate type or block type, and titanium oxy. Titanium-based compounds such as sulfate can be used, but ethylene glycol glycidyl ether, polyamide epichlorohydrin and the like can also be used. Examples of the water resistant agent include succinic peroxide, ammonium persulfate, calcium perchlorate, benzoin ethyl ether, ethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, glycerin diglycidyl ether, ammonium chloride, magnesium chloride and the like, but boric acid is preferable. Used. Water is preferred but not limited as the solvent for the cross-linking agent and / or the water resistant agent. The concentration of the cross-linking agent and / or the water-resistant agent can be appropriately determined by those skilled in the art depending on the type thereof, but in the case of boric acid as an example, the concentration in the treatment solution is 0.1 to 6.0 mass by mass. % Is preferable, and 1.0 to 4.0% by mass is more preferable. However, it is not essential to contain a cross-linking agent and / or a water-resistant agent, and if it is desired to shorten the time and the cross-linking treatment or the water-resistant treatment is unnecessary, this treatment step may be omitted. ..
(延伸工程)
 染色工程、洗浄工程1、又は架橋剤および/又は耐水化剤を含有させる工程を行った後に、延伸工程を行う。延伸工程は、樹脂フィルムを1軸に延伸することにより行う。延伸方法は湿式延伸法又は乾式延伸法のいずれでもよい。延伸倍率は、3倍以上であることが好ましく、より好ましくは4~8倍であり、特に好ましくは5~7倍である。
(Stretching process)
After performing the dyeing step, the washing step 1, or the step of adding a cross-linking agent and / or a water resistant agent, a stretching step is performed. The stretching step is performed by stretching the resin film uniaxially. The stretching method may be either a wet stretching method or a dry stretching method. The draw ratio is preferably 3 times or more, more preferably 4 to 8 times, and particularly preferably 5 to 7 times.
 湿式延伸法の場合には、水、水溶性有機溶剤、又はその混合溶液中で樹脂フィルムを延伸することが好ましい。架橋剤および/又は耐水化剤を少なくとも1種含有する溶液中に浸漬しながら延伸処理を行うことが好ましい。架橋剤および耐水化剤としては、架橋剤および/又は耐水化剤を含有させる工程について上述したのと同じものを用いることができる。延伸工程での架橋剤および/又は耐水化剤の溶液中の濃度は、例えば、0.5~15質量%が好ましく、2.0~8.0質量%がより好ましい。延伸温度は40~60℃で処理することが好ましく、45~58℃がより好ましい。延伸時間は通常30秒~20分であるが、2~5分がより好ましい。湿式延伸工程は1段で延伸することができるが、2段以上の多段延伸により行うこともできる。 In the case of the wet stretching method, it is preferable to stretch the resin film in water, a water-soluble organic solvent, or a mixed solution thereof. It is preferable to carry out the stretching treatment while immersing in a solution containing at least one cross-linking agent and / or water resistant agent. As the cross-linking agent and the water-resistant agent, the same ones as described above for the step of containing the cross-linking agent and / or the water-resistant agent can be used. The concentration of the cross-linking agent and / or the water resistant agent in the solution in the stretching step is preferably, for example, 0.5 to 15% by mass, more preferably 2.0 to 8.0% by mass. The stretching temperature is preferably 40 to 60 ° C, more preferably 45 to 58 ° C. The stretching time is usually 30 seconds to 20 minutes, but more preferably 2 to 5 minutes. The wet stretching step can be carried out in one step, but it can also be carried out by multi-step stretching in two or more steps.
 乾式延伸法の場合には、延伸加熱媒体が空気媒体の場合には、空気媒体の温度が常温から180℃で樹脂フィルムを延伸するのが好ましい。又、湿度は20~95%RHの雰囲気中とすることが好ましい。加熱方法としては、例えば、ロール間ゾーン延伸法、ロール加熱延伸法、圧延伸法、および赤外線加熱延伸法等が挙げられるが、その延伸方法は限定されるものではない。延伸工程は1段で延伸することもできるが、2段以上の多段延伸により行うこともできる。 In the case of the dry stretching method, when the stretching heating medium is an air medium, it is preferable to stretch the resin film at a temperature of the air medium from room temperature to 180 ° C. The humidity is preferably in an atmosphere of 20 to 95% RH. Examples of the heating method include, for example, an inter-roll zone stretching method, a roll heating stretching method, a pressure stretching method, an infrared heating stretching method, and the like, but the stretching method is not limited. The stretching step can be carried out in one step, but can also be carried out by multi-step stretching in two or more steps.
(洗浄工程2)
 延伸工程を行った後には、樹脂フィルム表面に架橋剤および/又は耐水化剤の析出、又は異物が付着することがあるため、樹脂フィルム表面を洗浄する洗浄工程(以下、「洗浄工程2」とも称する)を行うことができる。洗浄時間は1秒~5分が好ましい。洗浄方法は、樹脂フィルムを洗浄液に浸漬することが好ましいが、溶液を樹脂フィルムに塗布又は塗工によって洗浄することもできる。洗浄液としては、水が好ましい。1段で洗浄処理することもできるし、2段以上の多段処理をすることもできる。洗浄工程の溶液温度は、特に限定されないが通常5~50℃、好ましくは10~40℃である。
(Washing step 2)
After the stretching step, a cross-linking agent and / or a water resistant agent may precipitate on the surface of the resin film, or foreign matter may adhere to the surface of the resin film. Can be referred to). The washing time is preferably 1 second to 5 minutes. The cleaning method is preferably to immerse the resin film in the cleaning liquid, but the solution can also be applied to the resin film or washed by coating. Water is preferable as the cleaning liquid. The cleaning treatment can be performed in one stage, or the multi-stage treatment in two or more stages can be performed. The solution temperature in the washing step is not particularly limited, but is usually 5 to 50 ° C, preferably 10 to 40 ° C.
 ここまでの処理工程で用いる処理液又はその溶媒としては、水の他、例えば、ジメチルスルホキシド、N-メチルピロリドン、メタノール、エタノール、プロパノール、イソプロピルアルコール、グリセリン、エチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール、ジエチレングリコール、トリエチレングリコール、テトラエチレングリコール又はトリメチロールプロパン等のアルコール類、エチレンジアミンおよびジエチレントリアミン等のアミン類等が挙げられるが、これらに限定されるものではない。処理液又はその溶媒は、最も好ましくは水である。又、これらの処理液又はその溶媒は、1種単独で用いることもできるが、2種以上の混合物を用いることもできる。 The treatment liquid or its solvent used in the treatment steps up to this point includes water, for example, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropyl alcohol, glycerin, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, diethylene glycol, and triethylene. Examples thereof include alcohols such as glycol, tetraethylene glycol or trimethylolpropane, and amines such as ethylenediamine and diethylenetriamine, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The treatment liquid or its solvent is most preferably water. Moreover, these treatment liquids or the solvent thereof can be used individually by 1 type, but a mixture of 2 or more types can also be used.
(乾燥工程)
 延伸工程又は洗浄工程2の後には、樹脂フィルムの乾燥工程を行う。乾燥処理は、自然乾燥により行うことができるが、より乾燥効率を高めるためにはロールによる圧縮やエアーナイフ、又は吸水ロール等による表面の水分除去等により行うことができ、および/又は送風乾燥により行うこともできる。乾燥処理温度としては、20~100℃で乾燥処理することが好ましく、60~100℃で乾燥処理することがより好ましい。乾燥処理時間は例えば30秒~20分であるが、5~10分であることが好ましい。
(Drying process)
After the stretching step or the washing step 2, a drying step of the resin film is performed. The drying treatment can be carried out by natural drying, but in order to further improve the drying efficiency, it can be carried out by compression with a roll, removal of moisture on the surface with an air knife, a water absorption roll, etc., and / or by blower drying. You can also do it. As the drying treatment temperature, the drying treatment is preferably performed at 20 to 100 ° C., and more preferably 60 to 100 ° C. The drying treatment time is, for example, 30 seconds to 20 minutes, but is preferably 5 to 10 minutes.
 偏光素子の作製方法では、膨潤工程における基材の膨潤度、染色工程における各アゾ化合物の配合比、染色溶液の温度、pH、塩化ナトリウムや芒硝、トリポリリン酸ナトリウム等の塩の種類やその濃度、および染色時間、並びに延伸工程における延伸倍率は、偏光素子が以下の(i)~(v)の条件の少なくとも1つを満たすように調整することが好適であり、(vi)および(vii)の条件をさらに満たすように調整することがより好適である。
(i)平行位透過率について、AT420-480とAT520-590との差が絶対値として2.5以下となり、AT520-590とAT600-640との差が絶対値として2.0以下となる。
(ii)直交位透過率について、AT420-480とAT520-590との差が絶対値として1.0以下となり、AT520-590とAT600-640との差が絶対値として1.0以下となる。
(iii)視感度補正後の単体透過率が28%~45%となる。
(iv)a*値およびb*値の絶対値の各々が、偏光素子単体でともに1.0以下となり、平行位でともに2.0以下となる。
(v)直交位で測定されたa*値およびb*値の絶対値の各々が、ともに2以下となる。
(vi)各波長の平行位透過率について、AT520-590が25~35%となる。
(vii)各波長の単体透過率、または各波長の直交位透過率において、AT380-420とAT420-480との差が15%以下、AT480-520とAT420-480との差が15%以下、AT480-520とAT520-590と差が15%以下、および/又はAT640-780とAT600-640との差が20%以下となる。
In the method for producing a polarizing element, the degree of swelling of the base material in the swelling step, the compounding ratio of each azo compound in the dyeing step, the temperature of the dyeing solution, the pH, the type and concentration of salts such as sodium chloride, Glauber's salt, sodium tripolyphosphate, etc. And the dyeing time and the stretching ratio in the stretching step are preferably adjusted so that the polarizing element satisfies at least one of the following conditions (i) to (v), and of (vi) and (vii). It is more preferable to adjust so as to further satisfy the conditions.
(I) Regarding the parallel transmittance, the difference between AT 420-480 and AT 520-590 is 2.5 or less as an absolute value, and the difference between AT 520-590 and AT 600-640 is 2.0 as an absolute value. It becomes as follows.
(Ii) Regarding the orthogonal position transmittance, the difference between AT 420-480 and AT 520-590 is 1.0 or less as an absolute value, and the difference between AT 520-590 and AT 600-640 is 1.0 as an absolute value. It becomes as follows.
(Iii) The single transmittance after the luminosity factor correction is 28% to 45%.
(Iv) Each of the absolute values of the a * value and the b * value is 1.0 or less for the polarizing element alone and 2.0 or less for both the parallel positions.
(V) Each of the absolute values of the a * value and the b * value measured at the orthogonal positions is 2 or less.
(Vi) AT 520-590 is 25 to 35% for the parallel transmittance of each wavelength.
(Vii) single axis transmittance of each wavelength, or in the perpendicular position transmittance of each wavelength, AT 380-420 a difference between the AT 420-480 15% or less, the difference between the AT 480-520 and AT 420-480 The difference between AT 480-520 and AT 520-590 is 15% or less, and / or the difference between AT 640-780 and AT 600-640 is 20% or less.
 以上の方法により、式(1)及び式(2)で表されるアゾ化合物の組合せ、又は任意に式(6)、または式(7)で表されるアゾ化合物の組合せを少なくとも含む偏光素子を製造することができる。かかる偏光素子は、従来の偏光素子より高い透過率および高い偏光度を有しながらも、単体で中性色(ニュートラルグレー)を有する色相である。一態様において、偏光素子2枚を吸収軸方向が平行になるように重ねて配置した際に高品位な紙のような白色を表現できる。一態様において、さらに、偏光素子は、偏光素子2枚を吸収軸方向が直交になるように重ねて配置した際に、高級感のある無彩色な黒を示す。又、偏光素子は、高温および高湿度に対して耐久性が高い。 By the above method, a polarizing element containing at least a combination of azo compounds represented by the formulas (1) and (2), or optionally a combination of azo compounds represented by the formula (6) or the formula (7). Can be manufactured. Such a polarizing element has a hue having a neutral color (neutral gray) by itself while having a higher transmittance and a higher degree of polarization than a conventional polarizing element. In one aspect, when two polarizing elements are stacked so as to be parallel to each other in the absorption axis direction, a high-quality paper-like white color can be expressed. In one aspect, the polarizing element further exhibits a high-quality achromatic black when two polarizing elements are stacked so as to be orthogonal to each other in the absorption axis direction. Further, the polarizing element has high durability against high temperature and high humidity.
<偏光板>
 本発明に係る偏光板は、偏光素子と、該偏光素子の片面又は両面に設けられた透明保護層とを備える。透明保護層は、偏光素子の耐水性や取扱性の向上等を目的として設けられる。
<Polarizer>
The polarizing plate according to the present invention includes a polarizing element and a transparent protective layer provided on one side or both sides of the polarizing element. The transparent protective layer is provided for the purpose of improving the water resistance and handleability of the polarizing element.
 上記透明保護層は、透明物質を用いて形成された保護フィルムである。保護フィルムは、偏光素子の形状を維持できる層形状を有するフィルムであり、透明性や機械的強度、熱安定性、水分遮蔽性等に優れるプラスチック等が好ましい。これと同等な層を形成することで同等な機能を設けることでもよい。保護フィルムを構成するプラスチックの一例としては、ポリエステル系樹脂、アセテート系樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン系樹脂、ポリカーボネート系樹脂、ポリアミド系樹脂、ポリイミド系樹脂、ポリオレフィン系樹脂およびアクリル系樹脂等の熱可塑性樹脂、アクリル系、ウレタン系、アクリルウレタン系、エポキシ系およびシリコーン系等の熱硬化性樹脂又は紫外線硬化性樹脂などから得られるフィルムが挙げられ、これらのうちポリオレフィン系樹脂としては、非晶性ポリオレフィン系樹脂であってノルボルネン系モノマー又は多環状ノルボルネン系モノマーのような環状ポリオレフィンの重合単位を有する樹脂が挙げられる。一般的に、保護フィルムをラミネートした後に偏光素子の性能を阻害しない保護フィルムを選択することが好ましく、そのような保護フィルムとして、セルロースアセテート系樹脂よりなるトリアセチルセルロース(TAC)およびノルボルネンが特に好ましい。又、保護フィルムは、本発明の効果を損なわない限り、ハードコート処理や反射防止処理、スティッキングの防止や拡散、アンチグレア等を目的とした処理などを施したものであってもよい。透明保護層の厚さは通常10~200μmであることが好ましい。 The transparent protective layer is a protective film formed by using a transparent substance. The protective film is a film having a layered shape capable of maintaining the shape of the polarizing element, and is preferably a plastic or the like having excellent transparency, mechanical strength, thermal stability, moisture shielding property, and the like. An equivalent function may be provided by forming a layer equivalent to this. Examples of plastics constituting the protective film include thermoplastic resins such as polyester resins, acetate resins, polyether sulfone resins, polycarbonate resins, polyamide resins, polyimide resins, polyolefin resins and acrylic resins. Examples thereof include films obtained from thermosetting resins such as acrylic, urethane, acrylic urethane, epoxy and silicone, or ultraviolet curable resins, and among these, the polyolefin resin is an amorphous polyolefin resin. However, a resin having a polymerization unit of a cyclic polyolefin such as a norbornene-based monomer or a polycyclic norbornene-based monomer can be mentioned. In general, it is preferable to select a protective film that does not impair the performance of the polarizing element after laminating the protective film, and as such a protective film, triacetyl cellulose (TAC) made of a cellulose acetate resin and norbornene are particularly preferable. .. Further, the protective film may be subjected to a hard coat treatment, an antireflection treatment, a sticking prevention / diffusion treatment, an antiglare treatment, or the like, as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired. The thickness of the transparent protective layer is usually preferably 10 to 200 μm.
 上記偏光板は、透明保護層と偏光素子との間に、透明保護層を偏光素子と貼り合わせるための接着剤層をさらに備えることが好ましい。接着剤層を構成する接着剤としては特に限定されない。例えば、ポリビニルアルコール系接着剤、ウレタンエマルジョン系接着剤、アクリル系接着剤、及びポリエステルーイソシアネート系接着剤などが挙げられ、ポリビニルアルコール系接着剤が好適である。ポリビニルアルコール系接着剤として、例えば、ゴーセノールNH-26(日本合成社製)およびエクセバールRS-2117(クラレ社製)等が挙げられるが、これに限定されるものではない。接着剤には、架橋剤および/又は耐水化剤を添加することができる。ポリビニルアルコール系接着剤としては、無水マレイン酸-イソブチレン共重合体を用いることが好ましく、必要により架橋剤を混合した接着剤を用いることができる。無水マレイン酸-イソブチレン共重合体としては、例えば、イソバン#18(クラレ社製)、イソバン#04(クラレ社製)、アンモニア変性イソバン#104(クラレ社製)、アンモニア変性イソバン#110(クラレ社製)、イミド化イソバン#304(クラレ社製)、およびイミド化イソバン#310(クラレ社製)等が挙げられる。その際の架橋剤には水溶性多価エポキシ化合物を用いることができる。水溶性多価エポキシ化合物としては、例えば、デナコールEX-521(ナガセケムテック社製)およびテトラット-C(三井ガス化学社製)等が挙げられる。又、ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂以外の接着剤として、ウレタン系、アクリル系、エポキシ系といった公知の接着剤を用いることも出来る。特に、アセトアセチル基変性されたポリビニルアルコールを用いることが好ましく、さらにはその架橋剤として、多価アルデヒドを用いることが好ましい。又、接着剤の接着力の向上又は耐水性の向上を目的として、亜鉛化合物、塩化物、およびヨウ化物等の添加物を単独で又は同時に0.1~10質量%程度の濃度で含有させることもできる。接着剤への添加物は、特に限定されず、当業者が適宜選択することができる。透明保護層と偏光素子とを接着剤で貼り合せた後、適切な温度で乾燥又は熱処理を行うことによって偏光板を得ることができる。 It is preferable that the polarizing plate further includes an adhesive layer for adhering the transparent protective layer to the polarizing element between the transparent protective layer and the polarizing element. The adhesive constituting the adhesive layer is not particularly limited. Examples thereof include polyvinyl alcohol-based adhesives, urethane emulsion-based adhesives, acrylic-based adhesives, polyester-isocyanate-based adhesives, and the like, and polyvinyl alcohol-based adhesives are preferable. Examples of the polyvinyl alcohol-based adhesive include, but are not limited to, Gosenol NH-26 (manufactured by Nippon Synthetic Co., Ltd.) and Exevar RS-2117 (manufactured by Kuraray). A cross-linking agent and / or a water resistant agent can be added to the adhesive. As the polyvinyl alcohol-based adhesive, it is preferable to use a maleic anhydride-isobutylene copolymer, and if necessary, an adhesive mixed with a cross-linking agent can be used. Examples of the maleic anhydride-isobutylene copolymer include Isovan # 18 (manufactured by Kuraray), Isoban # 04 (manufactured by Kuraray), Ammonia-modified Isovan # 104 (manufactured by Kuraray), and Ammonia-modified Isovan # 110 (manufactured by Kuraray). ), Imidized Isovan # 304 (manufactured by Kuraray), Imidized Isovan # 310 (manufactured by Kuraray) and the like. A water-soluble polyvalent epoxy compound can be used as the cross-linking agent at that time. Examples of the water-soluble polyvalent epoxy compound include Denacol EX-521 (manufactured by Nagase Chemtech) and Tetrat-C (manufactured by Mitsui Gas Chemicals). Further, as an adhesive other than the polyvinyl alcohol-based resin, known adhesives such as urethane-based, acrylic-based, and epoxy-based adhesives can also be used. In particular, it is preferable to use polyvinyl alcohol modified with an acetoacetyl group, and further, it is preferable to use a polyhydric aldehyde as a cross-linking agent thereof. Further, for the purpose of improving the adhesive strength or water resistance of the adhesive, additives such as zinc compound, chloride and iodide are contained alone or simultaneously at a concentration of about 0.1 to 10% by mass. You can also. Additives to the adhesive are not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected by those skilled in the art. A polarizing plate can be obtained by bonding the transparent protective layer and the polarizing element with an adhesive and then drying or heat-treating at an appropriate temperature.
 偏光素子または偏光板は場合によって、例えば液晶、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(通称、OLED又はOEL)等の表示装置に貼り合わせる場合、後に非露出面となる保護層又はフィルムの表面に視野角改善および/又はコントラスト改善のための各種機能性層、輝度向上性を有する層又はフィルムを設けることもできる。各種機能性層は、例えば、位相差を制御する層又はフィルムである。偏光板は、これらのフィルムや表示装置に、粘着剤により貼り合わされることが好ましい。 In some cases, when the polarizing element or polarizing plate is attached to a display device such as a liquid crystal or an organic electroluminescence (commonly known as OLED or OEL), the viewing angle is improved and / or the surface of the protective layer or film which becomes an unexposed surface later is improved. Various functional layers for improving contrast, layers or films having brightness improving properties can also be provided. The various functional layers are, for example, layers or films that control the phase difference. The polarizing plate is preferably attached to these films and display devices with an adhesive.
 偏光素子または偏光板は、その透明保護層又はフィルムの露出面に、AR層(反射防止層)、防眩層、およびハードコート層等の公知の各種機能性層を備えていてもよい。この各種機能性を有する層を作製するには塗工方法が好ましいが、その機能を有するフィルムを接着剤又は粘着剤を介して貼合せることもできる。 The polarizing element or the polarizing plate may be provided with various known functional layers such as an AR layer (antireflection layer), an antiglare layer, and a hard coat layer on the transparent protective layer or the exposed surface of the film. A coating method is preferable for producing layers having various functions, but a film having the functions can also be attached via an adhesive or an adhesive.
 上記ハードコート層としては、例えばアクリル系やポリシロキサン系のハードコート層やウレタン系の保護層等が挙げられる。また、上記AR層により、単板光透過率のさらなる向上が期待できる。AR層は、例えば二酸化珪素、酸化チタン等の物質を蒸着又はスパッタリング処理によって形成することができ、またフッ素系物質を薄く塗布することにより形成することができる。 Examples of the hard coat layer include an acrylic or polysiloxane-based hard coat layer and a urethane-based protective layer. Further, the AR layer can be expected to further improve the single plate light transmittance. The AR layer can be formed by depositing or sputtering a substance such as silicon dioxide or titanium oxide, or by applying a thin coating of a fluorine-based substance.
 偏光素子または偏光板は場合によって、例えば液晶、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(通称、OLED又はOEL)等の表示装置に貼り合わせる場合、後に非露出面となる透明保護層又はフィルムの表面に視野角改善および/又はコントラスト改善のための各種機能性層、輝度向上性を有する層又はフィルムを設けることもできる。各種機能性層は、例えば、位相差を制御する層又はフィルムである(以下、「位相差板」とも称する)。位相差板を貼付することにより、本発明の偏光板を楕円偏光板として使用することもできる。偏光板は、これらのフィルムや表示装置に、粘着剤により貼り合わされることが好ましい。 In some cases, when the polarizing element or polarizing plate is attached to a display device such as a liquid crystal or an organic electroluminescence (commonly known as OLED or OEL), the viewing angle is improved and / or on the surface of a transparent protective layer or film which is later a non-exposed surface. Alternatively, various functional layers for improving contrast, and a layer or film having brightness improving property may be provided. The various functional layers are, for example, a layer or a film that controls the phase difference (hereinafter, also referred to as a "phase difference plate"). By attaching a retardation plate, the polarizing plate of the present invention can also be used as an elliptical polarizing plate. The polarizing plate is preferably attached to these films and display devices with an adhesive.
 本発明に係る偏光板は、高い透過率および高い偏光度を有しながらも無彩色性を実現することができる。一態様において、白表示時に高品位な紙のような白色を表現でき、かつ、黒表示時にニュートラルな黒色を表現し得る。一態様において、本発明に係る偏光板は高耐久性を有する。 The polarizing plate according to the present invention can realize achromaticity while having high transmittance and high degree of polarization. In one aspect, a high-quality paper-like white color can be expressed when displayed in white, and a neutral black color can be expressed when displayed in black. In one aspect, the polarizing plate according to the present invention has high durability.
<表示装置>
 本発明の偏光素子又は偏光板は、必要に応じて保護層又は機能層およびガラス、水晶、サファイア等の透明な支持体等を設け、液晶プロジェクター、電卓、時計、ノートパソコン、ワープロ、液晶テレビ、偏光レンズ、偏光メガネ、カーナビゲーション、および屋内外の計測器や表示器等に適用される。
<Display device>
The polarizing element or polarizing plate of the present invention is provided with a protective layer or a functional layer and a transparent support such as glass, crystal, or sapphire, if necessary, and is provided with a liquid crystal projector, a calculator, a clock, a notebook computer, a word processor, a liquid crystal television, or the like. It is applied to polarized lenses, polarized glasses, car navigation systems, and indoor and outdoor measuring instruments and indicators.
 特に、本発明の偏光素子又は偏光板は、液晶表示装置、例えば、反射型液晶表示装置、半透過液晶表示装置、および液晶表示装置以外でも有機エレクトロルミネッセンス等に好適に用いられる。一態様において、本発明の偏光素子又は偏光板を用いた液晶表示装置は、高品位な紙のような白色およびニュートラルな黒色を表現することができる。一態様において、さらに、該液晶表示装置は、高耐久性を有し信頼性が高く、長期的に高コントラストで、かつ、高い色再現性を有する液晶表示装置になる。 In particular, the polarizing element or polarizing plate of the present invention is suitably used for a liquid crystal display device, for example, a reflective liquid crystal display device, a semitransmissive liquid crystal display device, and an organic electroluminescence other than the liquid crystal display device. In one aspect, the liquid crystal display device using the polarizing element or the polarizing plate of the present invention can express high-quality paper-like white and neutral black. In one aspect, the liquid crystal display device further becomes a liquid crystal display device having high durability, high reliability, high contrast in the long term, and high color reproducibility.
 以下、実施例により本発明をさらに詳細に説明するが、本発明はこれらによって限定されるものではない。例中にある%は、特にことわらないかぎり質量基準である。 Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in more detail with reference to Examples, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The% in the example is based on mass unless otherwise specified.
[実施例1]
 ケン化度99%以上の平均重合度2400のポリビニルアルコールフィルム(クラレ社製 VF-PS#7500)を45℃の温水に2分浸漬し、膨潤処理を適用し延伸倍率を1.30倍とした。水を1500質量部、トリポリリン酸ナトリウムを1.5質量部、無水芒硝を1.5質量部、化合物例1-5を0.16質量部、化合物例2-12を0.30質量部、化合物例6-1を0.27質量部含有した45℃の染色液に6分00秒間浸漬して、フィルムにアゾ化合物を含有させた。得られたフィルムをホウ酸(富士フイルム和光純薬 社製)20g/lを含有した40℃の水溶液に1分浸漬した。浸漬後のフィルムを、5.0倍に延伸しながら、ホウ酸30.0g/lを含有した50℃の水溶液中で5分間の延伸処理を行った。得られたフィルムを、その緊張状態を保ちつつ、25℃の水に20秒間浸漬させることにより洗浄処理した。洗浄後のフィルムを70℃で9分間乾燥させ、偏光素子を得た。この偏光素子に対して、ポリビニルアルコール(日本酢ビポバール社製 NH-26)を4%で水に溶解したものを接着剤として用いて、アルカリ処理したトリアセチルセルロースフィルム(富士フイルム社製 ZRD-60)をラミネートして偏光板を得た。得られた偏光板は上記偏光素子が有していた光学性能、特に各波長の単体透過率、各波長の平行位透過率、各波長の直交位透過率、色相、偏光度等を維持していた。この偏光板を実施例1の測定試料とした。
[Example 1]
A polyvinyl alcohol film (VF-PS # 7500 manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd.) having an average degree of polymerization of 2400 with a saponification degree of 99% or more was immersed in warm water at 45 ° C. for 2 minutes, and a swelling treatment was applied to increase the stretching ratio to 1.30 times. .. 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous sodium sulfate, 0.16 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-5, 0.30 parts by mass of Compound Example 2-12, compound Example 6-1 was immersed in a staining solution containing 0.27 parts by mass at 45 ° C. for 6 minutes and 00 seconds to allow the film to contain an azo compound. The obtained film was immersed in an aqueous solution at 40 ° C. containing 20 g / l of boric acid (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) for 1 minute. The film after immersion was stretched 5.0 times in an aqueous solution at 50 ° C. containing 30.0 g / l of boric acid for 5 minutes. The obtained film was washed by immersing it in water at 25 ° C. for 20 seconds while maintaining its tension. The washed film was dried at 70 ° C. for 9 minutes to obtain a polarizing element. An alkali-treated triacetyl cellulose film (ZRD-60 manufactured by Fujifilm Co., Ltd.) was prepared by dissolving polyvinyl alcohol (NH-26 manufactured by Japan Vam & Poval Co., Ltd.) in water at 4% of this polarizing element as an adhesive. ) Was laminated to obtain a polarizing plate. The obtained polarizing plate maintains the optical performance of the above-mentioned polarizing element, particularly the single transmittance of each wavelength, the parallel position transmittance of each wavelength, the orthogonal position transmittance of each wavelength, the hue, the degree of polarization and the like. It was. This polarizing plate was used as the measurement sample of Example 1.
[実施例2]
 膨潤したフィルムを、水を1500質量部、トリポリリン酸ナトリウムを1.5質量部、無水芒硝を1.5質量部、化合物例1-4を0.16質量部、化合物例2-12を0.30質量部、化合物例6-1を0.27質量部含有した45℃の染色液に6分間処理し、アゾ化合物を含有させた以外は実施例1と同様にして偏光板を作製した。
[Example 2]
The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous glass, 0.16 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-4, and 0. A staining solution containing 30 parts by mass and 0.27 parts by mass of Compound Example 6-1 was treated for 6 minutes at 45 ° C. to prepare a polarizing plate in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained.
[実施例3]
 膨潤したフィルムを、水を1500質量部、トリポリリン酸ナトリウムを1.5質量部、無水芒硝を1.5質量部、化合物例1-24を0.21質量部、化合物例2-12を0.29質量部、化合物例6-1を0.26質量部含有した45℃の染色液に6分間処理し、アゾ化合物を含有させた以外は実施例1と同様にして偏光板を作製した。
[Example 3]
The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous glass, 0.21 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-24, and 0. A dyeing solution at 45 ° C. containing 29 parts by mass and 0.26 parts by mass of Compound Example 6-1 was treated for 6 minutes to prepare a polarizing plate in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained.
[実施例4]
 膨潤したフィルムを、水を1500質量部、トリポリリン酸ナトリウムを1.5質量部、無水芒硝を1.5質量部、化合物例1-4を0.13質量部、化合物例2-22の化合物を0.35質量部、化合物例6-1を0.24質量部含有した45℃の染色液に6分45秒間処理し、アゾ化合物を含有させた以外は実施例1と同様にして偏光板を作製した。
[Example 4]
The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous glass, 0.13 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-4, and the compound of Compound Example 2-22. A dyeing solution at 45 ° C. containing 0.35 parts by mass and 0.24 parts by mass of Compound Example 6-1 was treated for 6 minutes and 45 seconds, and the polarizing plate was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained. Made.
[実施例5]
 膨潤したフィルムを、水を1500質量部、トリポリリン酸ナトリウムを1.5質量部、無水芒硝を1.5質量部、化合物例1-4を0.15質量部、化合物例2-3を0.42質量部、化合物例6-1を0.25質量部含有した45℃の染色液に6分45秒間処理し、アゾ化合物を含有させた以外は実施例1と同様にして偏光板を作製した。
[Example 5]
The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous glass, 0.15 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-4, and 0. A dyeing solution at 45 ° C. containing 42 parts by mass and 0.25 parts by mass of Compound Example 6-1 was treated for 6 minutes and 45 seconds to prepare a polarizing plate in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained. ..
[実施例6]
 膨潤したフィルムを、水を1500質量部、トリポリリン酸ナトリウムを1.5質量部、無水芒硝を1.5質量部、化合物例1-4を0.16質量部、化合物例2-4を0.37質量部、化合物例6-1を0.27質量部含有した45℃の染色液に6分30秒間処理し、アゾ化合物を含有させた以外は実施例1と同様にして偏光板を作製した。
[Example 6]
The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous glass, 0.16 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-4, and 0. A dyeing solution at 45 ° C. containing 37 parts by mass and 0.27 parts by mass of Compound Example 6-1 was treated for 6 minutes and 30 seconds to prepare a polarizing plate in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained. ..
[実施例7]
 膨潤したフィルムを、水を1500質量部、トリポリリン酸ナトリウムを1.5質量部、無水芒硝を1.5質量部、化合物例1-4を0.17質量部、化合物例2-12を0.33質量部、化合物例7-84を0.28質量部含有した45℃の染色液に6分30秒間処理し、アゾ化合物を含有させた以外は実施例1と同様にして偏光板を作製した。
[Example 7]
The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous glass, 0.17 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-4, and 0. A dyeing solution at 45 ° C. containing 33 parts by mass and 0.28 parts by mass of Compound Example 7-84 was treated for 6 minutes and 30 seconds to prepare a polarizing plate in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained. ..
[実施例8]
 膨潤したフィルムを、水を1500質量部、トリポリリン酸ナトリウムを1.5質量部、無水芒硝を1.5質量部、化合物例1-24を0.17質量部、化合物例2-12を0.33質量部、化合物例7-84を0.26質量部含有した45℃の染色液に6分30秒間処理し、アゾ化合物を含有させた以外は実施例1と同様にして偏光板を作製した。
[Example 8]
The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous glass, 0.17 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-24, and 0. A dyeing solution at 45 ° C. containing 33 parts by mass and 0.26 parts by mass of Compound Example 7-84 was treated for 6 minutes and 30 seconds to prepare a polarizing plate in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained. ..
[実施例9]
 膨潤したフィルムを、水を1500質量部、トリポリリン酸ナトリウムを1.5質量部、無水芒硝を1.5質量部、化合物例1-9を0.15質量部、化合物例2-9を0.31質量部、化合物例7-84を0.30質量部含有した45℃の染色液に6分30秒間処理し、アゾ化合物を含有させた以外は実施例1と同様にして偏光板を作製した。
[Example 9]
The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous glass, 0.15 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-9, and 0. A dyeing solution at 45 ° C. containing 31 parts by mass and 0.30 parts by mass of Compound Example 7-84 was treated for 6 minutes and 30 seconds to prepare a polarizing plate in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained. ..
[実施例10]
 膨潤したフィルムを、水を1500質量部、トリポリリン酸ナトリウムを1.5質量部、無水芒硝を1.5質量部、式(1)の化合物として下記化合物例1-25を0.17質量部、化合物例2-12を0.32質量部、化合物例7-84を0.26質量部含有した45℃の染色液に6分30秒間処理し、アゾ化合物を含有させた以外は実施例1と同様にして偏光板を作製した。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
[Example 10]
The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous sodium sulfate, and 0.17 parts by mass of the following compound example 1-25 as the compound of the formula (1). Compound Example 2-12 was treated with a staining solution containing 0.32 parts by mass and Compound Example 7-84 by 0.26 parts by mass at 45 ° C. for 6 minutes and 30 seconds, and the same as Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained. A polarizing plate was prepared in the same manner.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
[実施例11]
 膨潤したフィルムを、水を1500質量部、トリポリリン酸ナトリウムを1.5質量部、無水芒硝を1.5質量部、化合物例1-8を0.16質量部、化合物例2-15を0.35質量部、化合物例6-2を0.30質量部含有した45℃の染色液に6分30秒間処理し、アゾ化合物を含有させた以外は実施例1と同様にして偏光板を作製した。
[Example 11]
The swollen film was prepared with 1500 parts by mass of water, 1.5 parts by mass of sodium tripolyphosphate, 1.5 parts by mass of anhydrous glass, 0.16 parts by mass of Compound Example 1-8, and 0. A dyeing solution at 45 ° C. containing 35 parts by mass and 0.30 parts by mass of Compound Example 6-2 was treated for 6 minutes and 30 seconds to prepare a polarizing plate in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained. ..
[比較例1]
 一般的な染料系偏光板として、ニュートラルグレー色を有するポラテクノ社製の高透過率染料系偏光板SHC-115を入手し、測定試料とした。
[Comparative Example 1]
As a general dye-based polarizing plate, a high-transmittance dye-based polarizing plate SHC-115 manufactured by Polatechno Co., Ltd., which has a neutral gray color, was obtained and used as a measurement sample.
[比較例2]
 一般的な染料系偏光板として、ニュートラルグレー色の、高コントラストを有するポラテクノ社製の染料系偏光板SHC-128を入手し、測定試料とした。
[Comparative Example 2]
As a general dye-based polarizing plate, a neutral gray-colored, high-contrast dye-based polarizing plate SHC-128 manufactured by Polatechno Co., Ltd. was obtained and used as a measurement sample.
[比較例3~8]
 特許文献14の比較例1の製法に従い、ただし、ヨウ素含有時間を、比較例3において5分30秒間、比較例4において4分45秒間、比較例5において4分15秒間、比較例6において3分30秒間、比較例7において4分00秒間、及び、比較例8において5分15秒間とし、ヨウ素系偏光板、即ちアゾ化合物を含まない偏光板を作製し、測定試料とした。
[Comparative Examples 3 to 8]
According to the production method of Comparative Example 1 of Patent Document 14, however, the iodine content time was set to 5 minutes and 30 seconds in Comparative Example 3, 4 minutes and 45 seconds in Comparative Example 4, 4 minutes and 15 seconds in Comparative Example 5, and 3 in Comparative Example 6. The time was 30 minutes, 30 seconds, 4 minutes and 00 seconds in Comparative Example 7, and 5 minutes and 15 seconds in Comparative Example 8, and an iodine-based polarizing plate, that is, a polarizing plate containing no azo compound was prepared and used as a measurement sample.
[比較例9]
 平行位においてペーパーホワイト色を示すポラテクノ社製のヨウ素系偏光板SKW-18245Pを入手し、測定試料とした。
[Comparative Example 9]
An iodine-based polarizing plate SKW-18245P manufactured by Polatechno Co., Ltd., which shows a paper white color in a parallel position, was obtained and used as a measurement sample.
[比較例10及び11] [Comparative Examples 10 and 11]
[比較例12]
 実施例1においてアゾ化合物を含有する水溶液(染色液)のみを特許文献3の実施例1と同じ組成とし、それぞれの染色時間を6分(比較例10)、5分(比較例11)としたこと以外は、本願の実施例1と同様にして、実施例1とほぼ同等の透過率になるように、膨潤したフィルムを水溶液に浸漬する時間を調整しアゾ化合物を含有させてそれぞれ比較例10及び11の偏光板を作製した。
 実施例1において、化合物例1-5に代えて、特許文献15 合成例1に記載のアゾ化合物を同量で染色液に含有させ、アゾ化合物を含有させた以外は実施例1と同様にして、偏光板を作製した。
[Comparative Example 12]
In Example 1, only the aqueous solution (staining solution) containing the azo compound had the same composition as in Example 1 of Patent Document 3, and the respective staining times were 6 minutes (Comparative Example 10) and 5 minutes (Comparative Example 11). Except for this, in the same manner as in Example 1 of the present application, the time for immersing the swollen film in the aqueous solution was adjusted so that the transmittance was almost the same as that of Example 1, and the azo compound was contained in each of Comparative Example 10. And 11 polarizing plates were prepared.
In Example 1, instead of Compound Example 1-5, the same amount of the azo compound described in Synthesis Example 1 of Patent Document 15 was contained in the staining solution, and the same as in Example 1 except that the azo compound was contained. , A polarizing plate was prepared.
[比較例13]
 実施例1において、化合物例1-5に代えて、C.I.Direct Red 4BHを染色液に同量で含有させ、アゾ化合物を含有させた以外は実施例1と同様にして、偏光板を作製した。
[Comparative Example 13]
In Example 1, instead of Compound Example 1-5, C.I. I. A polarizing plate was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that Direct Red 4BH was contained in the staining solution in the same amount and an azo compound was contained.
[比較例14]
 実施例5において、化合物例1-4に代えて、式(11)を染色液に同量で含有させ、アゾ化合物を含有させた以外は実施例5と同様にして、偏光板を作製した。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
[Comparative Example 14]
In Example 5, a polarizing plate was prepared in the same manner as in Example 5 except that the formula (11) was contained in the dyeing solution in the same amount in place of Compound Examples 1-4 and the azo compound was contained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
[比較例15]
 染料系偏光板に関する特許文献16の実施例1の通りに、偏光板を作製した。
[Comparative Example 15]
A polarizing plate was produced as in Example 1 of Patent Document 16 relating to a dye-based polarizing plate.
[比較例16]
 染料系偏光板に関する特許文献17の実施例3の通りに、偏光板を作製した。
[Comparative Example 16]
A polarizing plate was produced as in Example 3 of Patent Document 17 relating to a dye-based polarizing plate.
[比較例17]
 染料系偏光板に関する特許文献18の実施例1の通りに、偏光板を作製した。
[Comparative Example 17]
A polarizing plate was produced as in Example 1 of Patent Document 18 relating to a dye-based polarizing plate.
[比較例18]
 染料系偏光板に関する特許文献19の実施例15 No.1の通りに、偏光板を作製した。
[Comparative Example 18]
Example 15 No. of Patent Document 19 relating to a dye-based polarizing plate. A polarizing plate was produced as in 1.
[比較例19]
 実施例1において、化合物例1-5に代えて、同系色でウレイド骨格を有するアゾ化合物であるC.I.Direct Red 80を0.98質量部用いて、直交位の各波長の透過率がほぼ一定で、その色が黒になるように調整した以外は実施例1と同様にして、偏光板を作製した。
[Comparative Example 19]
In Example 1, an azo compound having a similar color and a ureido skeleton instead of Compound Example 1-5. I. Using 0.98 parts by mass of Direct Red 80, a polarizing plate was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the transmittance of each wavelength at the orthogonal position was adjusted to be substantially constant and the color was black. ..
[比較例20]
 実施例5において、化合物例2-3に代えて、同系色の二色性を有するジアニシジンの骨格を有するアゾ化合物であるC.I.Direct Blue 6を0.45質量部用いて、直交位の各波長の透過率がほぼ一定で、その色が黒になるように設計した点以外は実施例1と同様にして、偏光板を作製した。
[Comparative Example 20]
In Example 5, instead of Compound Example 2-3, C.I., an azo compound having a dichroic dianisidine skeleton of a similar color. I. Using 0.45 parts by mass of Direct Blue 6, a polarizing plate was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the transmittance of each wavelength at the orthogonal position was designed to be substantially constant and the color was black. did.
[評価方法]
 実施例1~11および比較例1~20で得られた測定試料の評価を次のようにして行った。
(a)各波長の単体透過率Ts、各波長の平行位透過率Tp、および各波長の直交位透過率Tc
 各測定試料の各波長の単体透過率Ts、平行位透過率Tp、および直交位透過率Tcを、分光光度計(日立製作所社製“U-4100”)を用いて測定した。ここで、各波長の単体透過率Tsは、測定試料を1枚で測定した際の各波長の透過率である。各波長の平行位透過率Tpは、2枚の測定試料をその吸収軸方向が平行となるように重ね合せて測定した各波長の分光透過率である。各波長の直交位透過率Tcは、2枚の偏光板をその吸収軸が直交するように重ね合せて測定した分光透過率である。測定は、400~700nmの波長にわたって行った。測定によって得られた結果より得られた平行位透過率Tpおよび直交位透過率Tcの各々の420~480nmにおける各波長の平均値、520~590nmにおける各波長の平均値、および600~640nmにおける各波長の平均値を表1に示す。
(b)視感度補正後の単体透過率Ys、視感度補正後の平行位透過率Yp、および視感度補正後の直交位透過率Yc
 各測定試料の視感度補正後の単体透過率Ys(%)、視感度補正後の平行位透過率Yp(%)、および視感度補正後の直交位透過率Yc(%)をそれぞれ求めた。視感度補正後の単体透過率Ys(%)、視感度補正後の平行位透過率Yp(%)、および視感度補正後の直交位透過率Yc(%)は、400~700nmの波長領域で、所定波長間隔dλ(ここでは5nm)おきに求めた各波長の上記単体透過率Ts、各波長の平行位透過率Tp、および各波長の直交位透過率Tcのそれぞれについて、JIS Z 8722:2009に従って視感度に補正した透過率である。具体的には、上記各波長の単体透過率Ts、各波長の平行位透過率Tp、および各波長の直交位透過率Tcを、下記式(V~VII)に代入して、それぞれ算出した。なお、下記式(V~VII)中、Pλは標準光(C光源)の分光分布を表し、yλは2度視野等色関数を表す。結果を表1に示す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000054
[Evaluation methods]
The evaluation of the measurement samples obtained in Examples 1 to 11 and Comparative Examples 1 to 20 was carried out as follows.
(A) Single transmittance Ts of each wavelength, parallel transmittance Tp of each wavelength, and orthogonal transmittance Tc of each wavelength.
The single transmittance Ts, the parallel position transmittance Tp, and the orthogonal position transmittance Tc of each wavelength of each measurement sample were measured using a spectrophotometer (“U-4100” manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.). Here, the simple substance transmittance Ts of each wavelength is the transmittance of each wavelength when the measurement sample is measured by one sheet. The parallel transmittance Tp of each wavelength is the spectral transmittance of each wavelength measured by superimposing two measurement samples so that their absorption axis directions are parallel to each other. The orthogonal transmittance Tc of each wavelength is a spectral transmittance measured by superimposing two polarizing plates so that their absorption axes are orthogonal to each other. Measurements were made over wavelengths of 400-700 nm. The average value of each wavelength at 420 to 480 nm for each of the parallel position transmittance Tp and the orthogonal position transmittance Tc obtained from the results obtained by the measurement, and the average value of each wavelength at 520 to 590 nm, and each at 600 to 640 nm. The average value of the wavelength is shown in Table 1.
(B) Single transmittance Ys after luminosity factor correction, parallel transmittance Yp after luminosity factor correction, and orthogonal transmittance Yc after luminosity factor correction.
The single transmittance Ys (%) after the luminosity factor correction, the parallel position transmittance Yp (%) after the luminosity factor correction, and the orthogonal position transmittance Yc (%) after the luminosity factor correction were obtained for each measurement sample. The single transmittance Ys (%) after the visual sensitivity correction, the parallel position transmittance Yp (%) after the visual sensitivity correction, and the orthogonal position transmittance Yc (%) after the visual sensitivity correction are in the wavelength region of 400 to 700 nm. JIS Z 8722: 2009 for each of the single transmittance Ts of each wavelength, the parallel position transmittance Tp of each wavelength, and the orthogonal position transmittance Tc of each wavelength obtained at predetermined wavelength intervals dλ (here, 5 nm). It is the transmittance corrected to the visual sensitivity according to. Specifically, the simple substance transmittance Ts of each wavelength, the parallel position transmittance Tp of each wavelength, and the orthogonal position transmittance Tc of each wavelength were substituted into the following equations (V to VII) to calculate each. In the following equations (V to VII), Pλ represents the spectral distribution of standard light (C light source), and yλ represents the two-degree visual field color matching function. The results are shown in Table 1.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000054
(c)コントラスト
 同一の測定試料を2枚用いて測定される視感度補正後の平行位透過率と視感度補正後の直交位透過率との比(Yp/Yc)を算出することにより、コントラスト(CR)を求めた。結果を表1に示す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000055
(C) Contrast Contrast by calculating the ratio (Yp / Yc) of the parallel transmittance after luminosity factor correction and the orthogonal luminosity factor after luminosity factor correction, which are measured using two identical measurement samples. (CR) was calculated. The results are shown in Table 1.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000055
(d)2つの波長帯域の各波長の平均透過率の差の絶対値
 表2には、各測定試料の各波長の平行位透過率Tpおよび各波長の直交位透過率Tcの各々の520~590nmにおける各波長の平均値と420~480nmにおける各波長の平均値との差の絶対値を示し、および520~590nmにおける各波長の平均値と600~640nmにおける各波長の平均値との差の絶対値を示す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000056
(D) Absolute value of the difference in the average transmittance of each wavelength in the two wavelength bands Table 2 shows the parallel transmittance Tp of each wavelength of each measurement sample and the orthogonal transmittance Tc of each wavelength of 520 to each. The absolute value of the difference between the average value of each wavelength at 590 nm and the average value of each wavelength at 420 to 480 nm is shown, and the difference between the average value of each wavelength at 520 to 590 nm and the average value of each wavelength at 600 to 640 nm. Indicates the absolute value.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000056
 表1および表2に示されるように、実施例1~11の測定試料の各波長の平行位透過率Tpは、520~590nmにおける平均値が30%以上であり、高い透過率を有していた。さらに、各波長の平行位透過率Tpは、420~480nmにおける各波長の平均値と、520~590nmにおける各波長の平均値との差が絶対値として2.5%以下であり、かつ、520~590nmにおける各波長の平均値と、600~640nmにおける各波長の平均値との差が絶対値として3.0%以下であり、両者ともに非常に低い値であった。又、各波長の直交位透過率Tcは、420~480nmにおける各波長の平均値と、520~590nmの各波長の平均値との差が絶対値として1.0%以下であり、かつ、520~590nmの各波長の平均値と、600~640nmにおける各波長の平均値との差が絶対値として1.0%以下であり、両者ともに非常に低い値であった。よって、実施例1~8で得られた測定試料は、平行位、及び直交位の各々において、各波長の平均透過率がほぼ一定であることが示された。
 一方、比較例1~9、及び比較例15~20の測定試料は、表2に示される各波長の平行位透過率Tpの上記波長帯域間の平均値の差の絶対値、および、各波長の直交位透過率Tcの上記波長帯域間の平均値の差の絶対値のうちの少なくともいずれかが高い値を示した。
As shown in Tables 1 and 2, the parallel transmittance Tp of each wavelength of the measurement samples of Examples 1 to 11 has an average value of 30% or more at 520 to 590 nm and has a high transmittance. It was. Further, regarding the parallel transmittance Tp of each wavelength, the difference between the average value of each wavelength at 420 to 480 nm and the average value of each wavelength at 520 to 590 nm is 2.5% or less as an absolute value, and 520. The difference between the average value of each wavelength at ~ 590 nm and the average value of each wavelength at 600 to 640 nm was 3.0% or less as an absolute value, both of which were very low values. Further, the orthogonal position transmittance Tc of each wavelength is such that the difference between the average value of each wavelength at 420 to 480 nm and the average value of each wavelength at 520 to 590 nm is 1.0% or less as an absolute value and 520. The difference between the average value of each wavelength at about 590 nm and the average value of each wavelength at 600 to 640 nm was 1.0% or less as an absolute value, both of which were very low values. Therefore, it was shown that the measurement samples obtained in Examples 1 to 8 had almost constant average transmittance at each wavelength in each of the parallel position and the orthogonal position.
On the other hand, in the measurement samples of Comparative Examples 1 to 9 and Comparative Examples 15 to 20, the absolute value of the difference between the average values of the parallel transmittance Tp of each wavelength shown in Table 2 and the difference between the wavelength bands, and each wavelength. At least one of the absolute values of the difference between the average values of the orthogonal position transmittance Tc between the wavelength bands showed a high value.
 又、視感度補正後の単体透過率が40~42%である実施例1~11と比較例10~14とを比べると、比較例10~14のコントラストは27~189であるのに対して、実施例1~11のコントラストは220以上を示しており、特に実施例5と比較例14を比較すると、実施例5は約20%高いコントラストを有していた。このように、本願の偏光板は高い性能を有していることが分かる。また各々のTpにおける520~590nmにおける各波長の平均値と420~480nmにおける各波長の平均値との差を見ると、実施例5は420~480nmにおいて0.83%高いのに対して比較例14は0.13%高いのみであることから、本願の偏光素子、またはその偏光板は420~480nmにおいて高い透過率を実現出来ることが分かる。 Further, when comparing Examples 1 to 11 and Comparative Examples 10 to 14 in which the single transmittance after the luminosity factor correction is 40 to 42%, the contrast of Comparative Examples 10 to 14 is 27 to 189. The contrast of Examples 1 to 11 was 220 or more, and when Example 5 and Comparative Example 14 were particularly compared, Example 5 had a contrast that was about 20% higher. As described above, it can be seen that the polarizing plate of the present application has high performance. Looking at the difference between the average value of each wavelength at 520 to 590 nm and the average value of each wavelength at 420 to 480 nm at each Tp, Example 5 is 0.83% higher at 420 to 480 nm, whereas it is a comparative example. Since 14 is only 0.13% higher, it can be seen that the polarizing element of the present application or its polarizing plate can realize a high transmittance at 420 to 480 nm.
(e)視感度補正後の偏光度ρy
 各測定試料の視感度補正後の偏光度ρyを、以下の式(VIII)に、視感度補正後の平行位透過率Ypおよび視感度補正後の直交位透過率Ycを代入して求めた。その結果を表3に示す。
 
ρy={(Yp-Yc)/(Yp+Yc)}1/2×100  式(VIII)
 
(E) Polarization degree ρy after luminosity factor correction
The degree of polarization ρy of each measurement sample after luminosity factor correction was obtained by substituting the parallel position transmittance Yp after luminosity factor correction and the orthogonal position transmittance Yc after luminosity factor correction into the following formula (VIII). The results are shown in Table 3.

ρy = {(Yp-Yc) / (Yp + Yc)} 1/2 x 100 equation (VIII)
(f)色度a*値およびb*値
 各測定試料について、JIS Z 8781-4:2013に従って、各波長の単体透過率Ts測定時、各波長の平行位透過率Tp測定時および各波長の直交位透過率Tc測定時の各々における色度a*値およびb*値を測定した。測定には、上記の分光光度計を使用し、透過色、反射色共に室外側から入射して測定した。光源には、C光源を用いた。結果を表3に示す。ここで、a*-sおよびb*-s、a*-pおよびb*-p並びにa*-cおよびb*-cは、各々単体透過率Ts、平行位透過率Tpおよび直交位透過率Tcの測定時における色度a*値およびb*値にそれぞれ対応する。
(F) Luminous a * value and b * value For each measurement sample, according to JIS Z 8781-4: 2013, when measuring the single transmittance Ts of each wavelength, when measuring the parallel transmittance Tp of each wavelength, and at each wavelength. The chromaticity a * value and b * value at each of the orthogonal position transmittance Tc measurements were measured. For the measurement, the above spectrophotometer was used, and both the transmitted color and the reflected color were incident from the outdoor side and measured. A C light source was used as the light source. The results are shown in Table 3. Here, a * -s and b * -s, a * -p and b * -p, and a * -c and b * -c have a single transmittance Ts, a parallel transmittance Tp, and an orthogonal transmittance, respectively. It corresponds to the chromaticity a * value and b * value at the time of Tc measurement, respectively.
(g)色の観察
 各測定試料について、白色の光源の上に、同一の測定試料を、平行位と直交位のそれぞれの状態で2枚重ね、その際に観察された色を調査した。観察は、10人の観察者が目視により行い、最も多く観察された色を表3に示す。なお、表3中、平行位の色は、同一試料2枚を、その吸収軸方向が互いに平行となるように重ねた状態(白表示時)での色を意味し、直交位の色は同一試料2枚を、その吸収軸方向が互いに直交するように重ねた状態(黒表示時)での色を意味する。基本的に、偏光色は、平行位の色は「白」であり、直交位の色は「黒」ではあるが、実施例では、例えば、黄色味を帯びた白を「黄」、青紫色を帯びた黒を「青紫」と示す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000057
(G) Observation of color For each measurement sample, two identical measurement samples were placed on a white light source in parallel and orthogonal positions, and the colors observed at that time were investigated. The observations were made visually by 10 observers, and Table 3 shows the most observed colors. In Table 3, the colors in the parallel position mean the colors in which two identical samples are stacked so that their absorption axis directions are parallel to each other (when displayed in white), and the colors in the orthogonal position are the same. It means the color in a state where two samples are stacked so that their absorption axis directions are orthogonal to each other (when displayed in black). Basically, as for the polarized color, the parallel position color is "white" and the orthogonal position color is "black", but in the embodiment, for example, yellowish white is "yellow" and bluish purple. Black with a tinge is indicated as "blue-purple".
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000057
 表3に示されるように、実施例1~11の測定試料は、視感度補正後の単体透過率において35%以上を有していた。実施例1~11の測定試料は、高透過率を有しつつも、99.5%以上の高い偏光度を示しており、白と黒とを十分に表現できることが分かった。さらに、実施例1~11の測定試料は、a*-s、b*-s、a*-p各々の絶対値は1.0以下であり、b*-pの絶対値は2.0以下であり、非常に低い値を示していた。実施例1~11の測定試料は、目視で観察した場合にも、平行位で高品位な紙のような白色を表現していた。又、波長帯域420nm~480nm、520nm~590nm、および600nm~640nmの各波長における直交位透過率が1%以下又は偏光度は約97%以上であることから黒色を表現していた。一方、比較例1~9、及び比較例15~20は、a*-s、b*-s、a*-p、b*-p、a*-cおよびb*-cの少なくともいずれかが高い値を示しているか、もしくは、比較例9のように直交位透過率が1%以上の場合には、目視で観察すると平行位又は直交位で無彩色ではなかった。 As shown in Table 3, the measurement samples of Examples 1 to 11 had a single transmittance of 35% or more after the visual sensitivity correction. It was found that the measurement samples of Examples 1 to 11 showed a high degree of polarization of 99.5% or more while having a high transmittance, and could sufficiently express white and black. Further, in the measurement samples of Examples 1 to 11, the absolute value of each of a * -s, b * -s, and a * -p is 1.0 or less, and the absolute value of b * -p is 2.0 or less. It showed a very low value. The measurement samples of Examples 1 to 11 expressed a high-quality paper-like white color in a parallel position even when visually observed. Further, since the orthogonal position transmittance at each wavelength of the wavelength band 420 nm to 480 nm, 520 nm to 590 nm, and 600 nm to 640 nm is 1% or less or the degree of polarization is about 97% or more, black is expressed. On the other hand, in Comparative Examples 1 to 9 and Comparative Examples 15 to 20, at least one of a * -s, b * -s, a * -p, b * -p, a * -c and b * -c is used. When it showed a high value or when the orthogonal position transmittance was 1% or more as in Comparative Example 9, it was not achromatic in the parallel position or the orthogonal position when visually observed.
 以上より、本発明の偏光素子は、高い単体透過率および平行位透過率を維持しつつも、平行位で高品位な紙のような白色を表現でき、かつ、単体で着色のない高品位な中性色(無彩色なニュートラルグレー)を有する色相であることが示された。さらに、本発明の偏光素子は、高い視感度補正後の単体透過率を維持し、平行位で無彩色性を発現していることに加えて、高い偏光度も兼ね備えていることが分かる。さらに、本発明の偏光素子は、直交位で、高級感のある無彩色な黒を示す偏光素子を得ることが可能になっていることが分かる。 From the above, the polarizing element of the present invention can express high-quality paper-like white color in parallel position while maintaining high single-unit transmittance and parallel-position transmittance, and is high-quality without coloring by itself. It was shown to be a hue with a neutral color (achromatic neutral gray). Further, it can be seen that the polarizing element of the present invention maintains a single transmittance after high luminosity factor correction, exhibits achromaticity in a parallel position, and also has a high degree of polarization. Further, it can be seen that the polarizing element of the present invention makes it possible to obtain a polarizing element showing a high-quality achromatic black at an orthogonal position.
(h)耐久性試験
 実施例1~11および比較例3~9の測定試料を、85℃、相対湿度85%RHの環境に240時間に適用した。その結果、実施例1~8の測定試料は透過率や色相の変化は見られなかった。これに対し、比較例3~9は偏光度が10%以上低下し、b*-cは-10より低くなり、見た目の色として著しく青色に変化し、特に2枚の測定試料を直交位に配置した場合(黒表示時)には大いに青色を呈色した。したがって、実施例1~8は高い耐久性を有していることが分かった。
(H) Durability test The measurement samples of Examples 1 to 11 and Comparative Examples 3 to 9 were applied to an environment of 85 ° C. and a relative humidity of 85% RH for 240 hours. As a result, no change in transmittance or hue was observed in the measurement samples of Examples 1 to 8. On the other hand, in Comparative Examples 3 to 9, the degree of polarization decreased by 10% or more, b * -c became lower than -10, and the apparent color changed to blue remarkably. When placed (when displayed in black), it developed a large blue color. Therefore, it was found that Examples 1 to 8 have high durability.
 本発明に係る偏光素子は、高透過率および高偏光度を有するとともに、白表示時および黒表示時の両方において無彩色であり、これを用いることにより極めて有用な無彩色偏光板および表示装置を提供できる。一態様において、本発明の偏光素子を用いることにより、白表示時に高品位な白色を呈する無彩色偏光板および表示装置を提供できる。
 
The polarizing element according to the present invention has high transmittance and high polarization degree, and is achromatic in both white display and black display. By using this, an extremely useful achromatic polarizing plate and display device can be obtained. Can be provided. In one aspect, by using the polarizing element of the present invention, it is possible to provide an achromatic polarizing plate and a display device that exhibit high-quality white color at the time of white display.

Claims (22)

  1.  式(1)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩と式(2)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩を含む偏光素子:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

     式(1)中、Arは置換基を有するフェニル基又は置換基を有するナフチル基を示し、Rr、Rrは各々独立に、水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、スルホ基、ハロゲン原子、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示し、かつ、Rr、Rrのいずれか少なくとも一方は、上記水素原子以外の基を示し、Rr~Rrは各々独立に、水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示し、jは0又は1を示し、Xrは置換基を有していても良いアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアゾ基、置換基を有していても良いベンゾイル基、又は、置換基を有していても良いベンゾイルアミノ基を示し;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

     式(2)中、Agは置換基を有するフェニル基又は置換基を有するナフチル基を示し、Bg、Cgは、各々独立に、下記式(3)又は式(4)で表され、いずれか一方が式(3)で表され、Xgは、置換基を有していても良いアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアゾ基、置換基を有していても良いベンゾイル基、又は置換基を有していても良いベンゾイルアミノ基を示し;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

     式(3)中、Rgは水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示し、pは0~2の整数を示し;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004

     式(4)中、RgおよびRgは各々独立に水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示す。
    A polarizing element containing an azo compound represented by the formula (1) or a salt thereof and an azo compound represented by the formula (2) or a salt thereof:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

    In formula (1), Ar 1 represents a phenyl group having a substituent or a naphthyl group having a substituent, and Rr 1 and Rr 2 independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, and an alkoxy of C1 to 4. A group, a sulfo group, a halogen atom, or a C1 to 4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group, and at least one of Rr 1 and Rr 2 shows a group other than the hydrogen atom, and Rr 3 to Rr 6 Independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1-4, an alkoxy group of C1-4, or an alkoxy group of C1-4 having a sulfo group, j represents 0 or 1, and Xr 1 represents a substituent. Amino group which may have, a phenylamino group which may have a substituent, a phenylazo group which may have a substituent, a benzoyl group which may have a substituent, or a substituent. Indicates a benzoylamino group that may have;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

    In the formula (2), Ag 1 represents a phenyl group having a substituent or a naphthyl group having a substituent, and Bg and Cg are independently represented by the following formula (3) or formula (4), whichever is used. One of them is represented by the formula (3), and Xg 1 is an amino group which may have a substituent, a phenylamino group which may have a substituent, and a phenylazo group which may have a substituent. , A benzoyl group which may have a substituent, or a benzoylamino group which may have a substituent;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

    In formula (3), Rg 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group, and p 1 represents an integer of 0 to 2. ;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004

    In formula (4), Rg 2 and Rg 3 independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group, respectively.
  2.  上記式(2)におけるCgが、上記式(3)で表される請求項1に記載の偏光素子。 The polarizing element according to claim 1, wherein the Cg in the above formula (2) is represented by the above formula (3).
  3.  上記式(2)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩が、下記式(5)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩である請求項1又は2に記載の偏光素子:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005

     式(5)中、Agは置換基を有するフェニル基又は置換基を有するナフチル基を示し、Rg、Rgは各々独立に水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、アルコキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示し、Xgは置換基を有していても良いアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアミノ基、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアゾ基、置換基を有していても良いベンゾイル基、又は、置換基を有していても良いベンゾイルアミノ基を示し、p、pは各々独立に0~2の整数を示す。
    The polarizing element according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the azo compound represented by the above formula (2) or a salt thereof is an azo compound represented by the following formula (5) or a salt thereof:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005

    In the formula (5), Ag 2 represents a phenyl group having a substituent or a naphthyl group having a substituent, and Rg 4 and Rg 5 are independently hydrogen atoms, alkyl groups of C1 to 4, alkoxy groups, or sulfo groups, respectively. Indicates an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a substituent, and Xg 2 is an amino group which may have a substituent, a phenylamino group which may have a substituent, and a phenylazo group which may have a substituent. , A benzoyl group which may have a substituent, or a benzoylamino group which may have a substituent, and p 2 and p 3 each independently indicate an integer of 0 to 2.
  4.  上記式(5)に記載のp及びpが、それぞれ1又は2である請求項3に記載の偏光素子。 The formula p 2 and p 3 as described in (5), the polarization element according to claim 3 are each 1 or 2.
  5.  上記式(1)のXrが、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアミノ基である請求項1~4のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子。 The polarizing element according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein Xr 1 of the above formula (1) is a phenylamino group which may have a substituent.
  6.  上記式(2)に記載のXgが、置換基を有していても良いフェニルアミノ基である請求項1~5のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子。 The polarizing element according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein Xg 1 described in the above formula (2) is a phenylamino group which may have a substituent.
  7.  下記式(6)または式(7)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩をさらに含む請求項1~6のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006

     式(6)中、Ay61はスルホ基、カルボキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、C1~4のアルキル基、又はC1~4のアルコキシ基を示し、Ry61~Ry64は各々独立に水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示し、kは1~3の整数を示し;
     式(7)中、Ay71及びAy72は各々独立に、置換基を有してもよいナフチル基、又は置換基を有してもよいフェニル基であり、s、tは各々独立に0又は1の整数であり、Ry71、Ry72、Ry77、Ry78が、各々独立に、水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基であり、Ry73~Ry76が、各々独立に、水素原子、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基を示す。
    The polarizing element according to any one of claims 1 to 6, further comprising an azo compound represented by the following formula (6) or formula (7) or a salt thereof:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006

    In the formula (6), Ay 61 represents a sulfo group, a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group of C1 to 4 or an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, and Ry 61 to Ry 64 are independent hydrogen atoms and C1 to C4, respectively. Indicates an alkyl group of C1-4, an alkoxy group of C1-4, or an alkoxy group of C1-4 having a sulfo group, and k indicates an integer of 1-3;
    In formula (7), Ay 71 and Ay 72 are naphthyl groups which may have a substituent or a phenyl group which may have a substituent, respectively, and s and t are 0 or 0 or t, respectively. It is an integer of 1, and Ry 71 , Ry 72 , Ry 77 , and Ry 78 are independently hydrogen atoms, C1 to 4 alkyl groups, and C1 to 4 alkoxy groups, and Ry 73 to Ry 76 are respectively. Independently, a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of C1 to 4, an alkoxy group of C1 to 4, and an alkoxy group of C1 to 4 having a sulfo group are shown.
  8.  上記式(7)における、Ay71、Ay72の少なくともいずれか一方が、下記式(8)で表される、式(7)で表されるアゾ化合物又はその塩を含む請求項7に記載の偏光素子:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007

     式(8)中、Ry81、Ry82のいずれか一方はスルホ基、カルボキシ基、又はスルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基であり、他方は水素原子、スルホ基、カルボキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基、C1~4のアルキル基、C1~4のアルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子、ニトロ基、アミノ基、C1~4のアルキル置換アミノ基、又はC1~4のアルキル置換アシルアミノ基であり、式中の*は、上記式(7)の末端アミド基のNH部位との結合位置を示す。
    The seventh aspect of claim 7, wherein at least one of Ay 71 and Ay 72 in the above formula (7) contains an azo compound represented by the formula (7) or a salt thereof, which is represented by the following formula (8). Polarizing element:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007

    In formula (8), one of Ry 81 and Ry 82 is a C1 to 4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group, a carboxy group, or a sulfo group, and the other is a hydrogen atom, a sulfo group, a carboxy group, or a sulfo group. With an alkoxy group of C1-4, an alkyl group of C1-4, an alkoxy group of C1-4, a halogen atom, a nitro group, an amino group, an alkyl-substituted amino group of C1-4, or an alkyl-substituted acylamino group of C1-4. Yes, * in the formula indicates the bonding position of the terminal amide group of the above formula (7) with the NH site.
  9.  上記式(8)における、Ry81、Ry82のいずれか一方がスルホ基又はカルボキシ基であり、他方が水素原子、スルホ基、カルボキシ基、メチル基、又はメトキシ基である請求項8に記載の偏光素子。 The eighth aspect of the above formula (8), wherein one of Ry 81 and Ry 82 is a sulfo group or a carboxy group, and the other is a hydrogen atom, a sulfo group, a carboxy group, a methyl group, or a methoxy group. Polarizing element.
  10.  上記式(7)における、Ay71、Ay72のいずれか少なくとも一方が置換基を有してもよいナフチル基である、請求項7~9のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子。 The polarizing element according to any one of claims 7 to 9, wherein at least one of Ay 71 and Ay 72 in the above formula (7) is a naphthyl group which may have a substituent.
  11.  上記式(7)における、Ay71、Ay72が、各々独立に、ヒドロキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基、及びスルホ基からなる群から選択される置換基を有してもよいナフチル基である請求項7~10のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子。 Ay 71 and Ay 72 in the above formula (7) may each independently have a substituent selected from the group consisting of a hydroxy group, a C1 to 4 alkoxy group having a sulfo group, and a sulfo group. The polarizing element according to any one of claims 7 to 10, which is a naphthyl group.
  12.  上記式(7)における、Ay71、Ay72が、それぞれ独立に、下記式(9)で表される、請求項7~11のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008

     式(9)中、Ry91は、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、スルホ基を有するC1~4のアルコキシ基、又はスルホ基であり、fは1~3の整数であり、*は、上記式(7)の末端アミド基のNH部位との結合位置を示す。
    The polarizing element according to any one of claims 7 to 11, wherein Ay 71 and Ay 72 in the above formula (7) are independently represented by the following formula (9):
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008

    In the formula (9), Ry 91 is an alkoxy group or a sulfo group of C1 to 4 having a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group and a sulfo group, f is an integer of 1 to 3, and * is the above formula (7). ) Indicates the binding position of the terminal amide group with the NH site.
  13.  上記式(9)において、Ry91が水素原子であり、fが2である請求項12に記載の偏光素子。 The polarizing element according to claim 12, wherein in the above formula (9), Ry 91 is a hydrogen atom and f is 2.
  14.  偏光素子2枚を、各々の吸収軸方向が互いに平行になるように重ねて測定して求められる各波長の透過率において、420nm~480nmの平均透過率と、520nm~590nmの平均透過率との差が絶対値として2.5%以下であり、かつ、520nm~590nmの平均透過率と、600nm~640nmの平均透過率との差が絶対値として3.0%以下である請求項1~13のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子。 The average transmittance of 420 nm to 480 nm and the average transmittance of 520 nm to 590 nm are the transmittances of each wavelength obtained by stacking two polarizing elements so that their absorption axis directions are parallel to each other. Claims 1 to 13 in which the difference is 2.5% or less as an absolute value, and the difference between the average transmittance of 520 nm to 590 nm and the average transmittance of 600 nm to 640 nm is 3.0% or less as an absolute value. The polarizing element according to any one of the above.
  15.  JIS Z 8781-4:2013に従い、自然光を用いて透過率測定時に求められるa*値およびb*値の絶対値が、
    上記偏光素子単体で、ともに1.0以下(-1.0≦a*-s≦1.0、-1.0≦b-s*≦1.0)であり、
    上記偏光素子2枚を、各々の吸収軸方向が互いに平行になるように重ねて配置した状態で、ともに2.0以下(-2.0≦a*-p≦2.0、-2.0≦b*-p≦2.0)である、
    請求項1~14のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子
    (a*-sは単体でのa*値を示し、b*-sは単体でのb*値を示し、a*-pは平行位でのa*値を示し、b*-pは平行位でのb*を示す)。
    According to JIS Z 8781-4: 2013, the absolute values of the a * value and b * value obtained when measuring the transmittance using natural light are
    Both of the above polarizing elements are 1.0 or less (-1.0 ≤ a * -s ≤ 1.0, -1.0 ≤ b-s * ≤ 1.0).
    In a state where the two polarizing elements are stacked and arranged so that their absorption axis directions are parallel to each other, both are 2.0 or less (-2.0 ≤ a * -p ≤ 2.0, -2.0". ≤b * -p ≤ 2.0),
    The polarizing element according to any one of claims 1 to 14 (a * -s indicates an a * value of a single substance, b * -s indicates a b * value of a single substance, and a * -p indicates a parallel value. Indicates the a * value at the position, and b * -p indicates b * at the parallel position).
  16.  偏光素子の視感度補正後の単体透過率が35%~45%であり、
    偏光素子2枚を、各々の吸収軸方向が互いに平行になるように重ねて配置した状態で求められる520nm~590nmの各波長の平均透過率が28%~45%である、請求項1~15のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子。
    The single transmittance of the polarizing element after correction of the luminosity factor is 35% to 45%.
    Claims 1 to 15 have an average transmittance of 28% to 45% for each wavelength of 520 nm to 590 nm, which is obtained by arranging two polarizing elements so as to be stacked so that their absorption axis directions are parallel to each other. The polarizing element according to any one of the above.
  17.  偏光素子2枚を、各々の吸収軸方向が互いに直交するように重ねて配置した状態で求められる各波長の透過率において、
    420nm~480nmの平均透過率と520nm~590nmの平均透過率との差が絶対値として1.0%以下であり、並びに、520nm~590nmの平均透過率と600nm~640nmの平均透過率との差が絶対値として1.0%以下である、
    請求項1~16のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子。
    In the transmittance of each wavelength obtained in a state where two polarizing elements are stacked and arranged so that their absorption axis directions are orthogonal to each other.
    The difference between the average transmittance of 420 nm to 480 nm and the average transmittance of 520 nm to 590 nm is 1.0% or less as an absolute value, and the difference between the average transmittance of 520 nm to 590 nm and the average transmittance of 600 nm to 640 nm. Is 1.0% or less as an absolute value,
    The polarizing element according to any one of claims 1 to 16.
  18.  波長帯域420nm~480nm、520nm~590nm、および600nm~640nmの各波長における直交位透過率が1%以下、又は偏光度が97%以上である、請求項1~17のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子。 The invention according to any one of claims 1 to 17, wherein the orthogonal position transmittance at each wavelength of the wavelength band 420 nm to 480 nm, 520 nm to 590 nm, and 600 nm to 640 nm is 1% or less, or the degree of polarization is 97% or more. Polarizing element.
  19.  偏光素子2枚を、各々の吸収軸方向が互いに直交するように重ねて配置した状態で、JIS Z 8781-4:2013に従い、自然光を用いた透過率測定時に求められるa*値およびb*値の絶対値がいずれも2.0以下(-2.0≦a*-c≦2.0、-2.0≦b*-c≦2.0)である、請求項1~18のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子(a*-cは直交位でのa*値を示し、b*-cは直交位でのb*を示す)。 With two polarizing elements stacked so that their absorption axis directions are orthogonal to each other, the a * value and b * value obtained when measuring the transmittance using natural light according to JIS Z 8781-4: 2013. Any of claims 1 to 18, wherein the absolute value of is 2.0 or less (-2.0 ≤ a * -c ≤ 2.0, -2.0 ≤ b * -c ≤ 2.0). The polarizing element according to item 1 (a * -c indicates an a * value at an orthogonal position, and b * -c indicates a b * at an orthogonal position).
  20.  ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂フィルムを基材として含む、請求項1~19のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子。 The polarizing element according to any one of claims 1 to 19, which comprises a polyvinyl alcohol-based resin film as a base material.
  21.  請求項1~20のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子と、該偏光素子の片面又は両面に設けられた透明保護層とを備える偏光板。 A polarizing plate including the polarizing element according to any one of claims 1 to 20 and a transparent protective layer provided on one side or both sides of the polarizing element.
  22.  請求項1~20のいずれか一項に記載の偏光素子又は請求項21に記載の偏光板を備える表示装置。
     
    A display device including the polarizing element according to any one of claims 1 to 20 or the polarizing plate according to claim 21.
PCT/JP2020/018265 2019-05-13 2020-04-30 Achromatic polarizer, achromatic polarizing plate using same, and display device WO2020230647A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202080033949.5A CN113795554A (en) 2019-05-13 2020-04-30 Achromatic polarizing element, and achromatic polarizing plate and display device using same
JP2021519370A JPWO2020230647A1 (en) 2019-05-13 2020-04-30

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019-090593 2019-05-13
JP2019090593 2019-05-13

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020230647A1 true WO2020230647A1 (en) 2020-11-19

Family

ID=73290135

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2020/018265 WO2020230647A1 (en) 2019-05-13 2020-04-30 Achromatic polarizer, achromatic polarizing plate using same, and display device

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2020230647A1 (en)
CN (1) CN113795554A (en)
TW (1) TW202106814A (en)
WO (1) WO2020230647A1 (en)

Citations (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH01265205A (en) * 1988-04-18 1989-10-23 Nippon Kayaku Co Ltd Polarizing plate
JPH02306203A (en) * 1989-05-22 1990-12-19 Nippon Kayaku Co Ltd Polarizing film
JPH08291259A (en) * 1995-02-20 1996-11-05 Sumitomo Chem Co Ltd Azo compound and dye-based polarizing film containing the same
JP2003313451A (en) * 2002-04-26 2003-11-06 Sumitomo Chem Co Ltd Azo compound or its salt, and their application to polarizing film
JP2004051645A (en) * 2001-06-28 2004-02-19 Sumitomo Chem Co Ltd Polyazo compound or its salt and dye-based polarizing film comprising the same
WO2015152026A1 (en) * 2014-03-31 2015-10-08 日本化薬株式会社 Azo compound, dye-based polarizing film containing same, and polarizing plate
WO2018079651A1 (en) * 2016-10-31 2018-05-03 日本化薬株式会社 Polarizing element, polarizing plate using same and liquid crystal display device
JP2018116205A (en) * 2017-01-20 2018-07-26 株式会社ポラテクノ Optical element and image display device and organic electroluminescence display device using the same
WO2019117131A1 (en) * 2017-12-11 2019-06-20 日本化薬株式会社 Achromatic polarizing element, and achromatic polarizing plate and display device using same
WO2019117123A1 (en) * 2017-12-13 2019-06-20 日本化薬株式会社 Polarizing element for visible region and infrared region, and polarizing plate
WO2019124161A1 (en) * 2017-12-22 2019-06-27 日本化薬株式会社 Azo compound or salt thereof, and polarizing element, polarizing plate, and display device comprising same
WO2020050333A1 (en) * 2018-09-05 2020-03-12 日本化薬株式会社 Polarizing element, and polarizing plate, optical member and like each using said polarizing element

Patent Citations (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH01265205A (en) * 1988-04-18 1989-10-23 Nippon Kayaku Co Ltd Polarizing plate
JPH02306203A (en) * 1989-05-22 1990-12-19 Nippon Kayaku Co Ltd Polarizing film
JPH08291259A (en) * 1995-02-20 1996-11-05 Sumitomo Chem Co Ltd Azo compound and dye-based polarizing film containing the same
JP2004051645A (en) * 2001-06-28 2004-02-19 Sumitomo Chem Co Ltd Polyazo compound or its salt and dye-based polarizing film comprising the same
JP2003313451A (en) * 2002-04-26 2003-11-06 Sumitomo Chem Co Ltd Azo compound or its salt, and their application to polarizing film
WO2015152026A1 (en) * 2014-03-31 2015-10-08 日本化薬株式会社 Azo compound, dye-based polarizing film containing same, and polarizing plate
WO2018079651A1 (en) * 2016-10-31 2018-05-03 日本化薬株式会社 Polarizing element, polarizing plate using same and liquid crystal display device
JP2018116205A (en) * 2017-01-20 2018-07-26 株式会社ポラテクノ Optical element and image display device and organic electroluminescence display device using the same
WO2019117131A1 (en) * 2017-12-11 2019-06-20 日本化薬株式会社 Achromatic polarizing element, and achromatic polarizing plate and display device using same
WO2019117123A1 (en) * 2017-12-13 2019-06-20 日本化薬株式会社 Polarizing element for visible region and infrared region, and polarizing plate
WO2019124161A1 (en) * 2017-12-22 2019-06-27 日本化薬株式会社 Azo compound or salt thereof, and polarizing element, polarizing plate, and display device comprising same
WO2020050333A1 (en) * 2018-09-05 2020-03-12 日本化薬株式会社 Polarizing element, and polarizing plate, optical member and like each using said polarizing element

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW202106814A (en) 2021-02-16
CN113795554A (en) 2021-12-14
JPWO2020230647A1 (en) 2020-11-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7230079B2 (en) AZO COMPOUND OR SALT THEREOF AND POLARIZING FILM CONTAINING THE SAME
JP5899122B2 (en) Azo compound, dye-based polarizing film and polarizing plate
JP6889178B2 (en) Polarizing element, and polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using this
JP7509851B2 (en) Azo compound or its salt, and polarizing element, polarizing plate, and display device containing the same
JP6054588B1 (en) Dye-type polarizing element, and polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using the same
JP6363185B2 (en) Achromatic polarizing plate with high transmission and high degree of polarization
CN107430234B (en) Polarizing element and polarizing plate
TWI776000B (en) Achromatic polarizing element, and achromatic polarizing plate and display using the same
WO2020230647A1 (en) Achromatic polarizer, achromatic polarizing plate using same, and display device
JP7035018B2 (en) Azo compounds or salts thereof, and dye-based polarizing films, dye-based polarizing plates, and liquid crystal display devices containing them.
WO2022071201A1 (en) Polarizing element, polarizing plate, and display device provided with same
WO2022071204A1 (en) Polarizing element, polarizing plate and display device provided with same
WO2021246437A1 (en) Polarizing element and polarizing plate for use in visible range and infrared range, and liquid crystal display device equipped with same

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20805055

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021519370

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20805055

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1